PTX_UM_P7_P7HD_CRP_254796G PTX UM P7 P7HD CRP 254796G

PTX_UM_P7_P7HD_CRP_254796G PTX_UM_P7_P7HD_CRP_254796G

User Manual: PTX_UM_P7_P7HD_CRP_254796G

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 378 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1 Introduction
2 Setting Up The Printer
3 Operating The Printer
4 The Configuration Menus
5 Interfaces
6 Reprogramming the Security Key
- Reprogramming The Security Key
  - How To Program The Security Key
7 Troubleshooting
- Cleaning Requirements
  - Exterior Cleaning
  - Interior Cleaning
- Diagnosing Problems
A Printer Specifications
B ASCII Character Set
C Zero Tear Printer
D Customer Support
E Communication Notices

P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printer

User’s Manual

Software License Agreement

CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND

CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS

PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO

THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN

THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE

AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU

OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE

REFUNDED.

Definitions.

“Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable

data and program. The term “Software Product” includes the

Software resident in the printer and its documentation. The

Software Product is licensed (not sold) to you, and Printronix,

Inc. either owns or licenses from other vendors who own, all

the Software Product.

License.

Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive

license to use the Software resident in the printer solely

for your own customary business or personal purposes.

Restrictions.

a. To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, Inc.,

you agree to maintain the Software Product and

other proprietary information concerning the

typefaces in strict confidence.

b. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software

Product.

c. You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise

transfer all or any portion of the Software Product

separate from the printer, without the prior written

consent of Printronix, Inc.

d. You may not modify or prepare derivative works of

the Software Product.

e. You may not transmit the Software Product over a

network, by telephone, or electronically using any

means; or reverse engineer, decompile or

disassemble the Software.

f. You agree to keep confidential and use your best

efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the

Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or

use.

Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the

printer, but only if the recipient agrees to accept the

terms and conditions of this Agreement. Your license is

automatically terminated if you transfer the Software

Product and printer.

Limited Software Product Warranty

Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery,

the Software will perform in accordance with specifications

published by Printronix, Inc. Printronix, Inc. does not warrant

that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

Remedy

Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc.

in connection with the Software is replacement of defective

software with a copy of the same version and revision level.

Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies

THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.

Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions

contained in the Software will meet your requirements or

that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or

error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to make

changes and/or improvements in the Software without

notice at any time.

IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE

FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS

INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR

INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF

PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY

DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR

MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME STATES

DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF

LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT

APPLY TO YOU.

Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage

caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any

other performance under this Agreement.

Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our

liability of any kind (including liability for negligence

except liability for personal injury caused solely by our

negligence) for the Software Product covered by this

Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance

by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the

remedies specified by this Agreement.

California law governs this Agreement.

Termination of License Agreement

This License shall continue until terminated. This license may

be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc.

or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail to comply with the terms of this

License and such failure is not corrected within thirty (30) days

after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall return

to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the

Software and documentation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights

Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to

restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and

Computer Software clause at FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision

(b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as appropriate. Further

use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions

applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR

52.227-19 (c) (2).

Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions

YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS

AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE

BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER

PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR

REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS

AGREEMENT. NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS

EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY

PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH

PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO

ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS

AGREEMENT.

READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER

User’s Manual

P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printers

This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No

part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated, or incorporated

in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,

electronic, mechanical, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of

Printronix.

Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this

material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability

and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix shall not be held responsible

for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any

damages, whether direct or indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection

with the furnishing, distribution, performance, or use of this material. The

information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Trademark Acknowledgements

ANSI is a registered trademark of the American National Standards Institute,

Inc.

Artifex, the Artifex logo , Ghostscript, and the Ghostscript logo

are registered trademarks of Artifex Software, Inc.

PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.

CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association.

Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corporation.

EIA is a registered service mark of the Electronic Industries Association.

ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States Environmental

Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR

Partner, Printronix has

determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy

efficiency.

Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.

IBM, AS/400, and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and Intelligent Printer

Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International Business Machines

Corporation.

IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers, Inc.

Printronix, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, and IGP are registered trademarks, and

P7005, P7010, P7015, P7205, P7210, P7215, P7220, and SureStak are

trademarks of Printronix, Inc.

QMS is a registered trademark, and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro

Systems, Inc.

TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc.

UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction........................................................... 11

Printer Overview .....................................................................................11

Printronix P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP) Series ...............11

Consumable Monitoring With PrintNet Enterprise ..................................13

Graphics Enhancements ........................................................................13

Taking Care Of Your Printer ...................................................................13

Conventions In This Manual ...................................................................13

Warnings And Special Information .........................................................14

Related Documents ................................................................................14

Contact Information ................................................................................15

Printronix Customer Support Center ................................................15

Printronix Supplies Department........................................................15

Corporate Offices .............................................................................16

2 Setting Up The Printer .......................................... 17

Before You Begin....................................................................................17

Power Requirements ..............................................................................17

Select A Site ...........................................................................................17

Printer Dimensions .................................................................................18

Printer Component Locations .................................................................21

3 Operating The Printer ........................................... 23

Powering On The Printer ........................................................................23

Operating Modes ....................................................................................23

The Control Panel...................................................................................24

Control Panel Keys ..........................................................................24

Cancel A Print Job ...........................................................................28

Operational Procedures..........................................................................29

Reload Paper ...................................................................................29

Unload Paper ...................................................................................38

Integrated Print Management System ....................................................41

Output Darkness ..............................................................................41

Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge....................................................42

Lighter Or Darker Print .....................................................................42

Changing Ribbon Cartridge..............................................................43

Table of Contents

4 The Configuration Menus .....................................47

Configuration Overview ..........................................................................47

Main Menu .......................................................................................47

Changing Parameter Settings ..........................................................48

Saving Parameter Settings ..............................................................48

Default And Custom Configurations.................................................48

Navigating the Menus ......................................................................49

Changing Parameters Example .......................................................50

Auto Save Configuration ..................................................................53

Saving Your New Configuration .......................................................53

Optimizing Print Quality....................................................................58

Optimizing Print Speed ....................................................................59

Dynamic Menu Options ..........................................................................60

Active Emulations ...................................................................................61

Main Menu ..............................................................................................63

P7000 STD Firmware.......................................................................64

P7000 TN Firmware .........................................................................66

P7000 PCL-II Firmware....................................................................68

P7000 LG Firmware .........................................................................70

P7000 ANSI Firmware .....................................................................72

OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript/PDF Firmware ............................74

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware ..............................76

QUICK SETUP Menu .............................................................................77

CONFIG. CONTROL Menu ....................................................................85

HOST INTERFACE Menu ......................................................................87

Auto Switching Submenu .................................................................88

IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu....................................90

Centronics (Parallel) Submenu ........................................................92

Dataproducts Submenu ...................................................................95

Serial Submenu................................................................................97

E-Net Adapter Submenu ................................................................103

Ethernet Submenu .........................................................................104

NETWORK SETUP Menu ....................................................................105

ADAPTER ADDRESS....................................................................105

ADAPTER PARAMS ......................................................................106

ETHERNET ADDRESS .................................................................109

ETHERNET PARAMS....................................................................110

WLAN ADDRESS ..........................................................................112

WLAN PARAMS.............................................................................113

WLAN KERBEROS........................................................................117

WLAN LEAP...................................................................................119

WLAN EAP.....................................................................................120

Table of Contents

ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus .....................121

EMULATION Menu...............................................................................123

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation ............................................................124

Standard.........................................................................................124

Simple Prot Conv ...........................................................................125

Coax Emulation..............................................................................126

Twinax Params ..............................................................................135

3270 Params..................................................................................141

5250 Params..................................................................................148

SPC Coax Params .........................................................................152

SPC Twx Params...........................................................................155

LinePrinter Plus Emulation ...................................................................157

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)..............................................159

P-Series Emulation ........................................................................164

P-Series Emulation (with PCL-II)....................................................164

P-Series Emulation (With LG) ........................................................165

P-Series XQ Emulation ..................................................................172

Serial Matrix Emulation ..................................................................174

Proprinter XL Emulation .................................................................179

Epson FX Emulation ......................................................................183

ANSI Emulation ....................................................................................188

IGP/PGL Emulation ..............................................................................195

Features .........................................................................................195

Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel.......................196

IGP/PGL Submenu ........................................................................197

IGP/PGL Submenu (With PCL-II)...................................................198

IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG).........................................................199

IGP/VGL Emulation ..............................................................................209

Features .........................................................................................209

Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel.......................210

IGP/VGL Submenu ........................................................................210

IGP/VGL Submenu (with PCL-II)....................................................212

IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG).........................................................214

IPDS Emulation ....................................................................................225

PCL - II Emulation.................................................................................229

LG Emulation ........................................................................................233

OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation ............................................238

Postscript/PDF Interpreter..............................................................238

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu..............................................................242

PRINTER CONTROL Menu .................................................................251

ADVANCED USER Menu.....................................................................254

DIAGNOSTICS Menu...........................................................................261

Table of Contents

DATE Menu ..........................................................................................264

PRINTER MGMT Menu ........................................................................265

5 Interfaces ............................................................ 267

Overview...............................................................................................267

Dataproducts Parallel Interface ............................................................268

Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals .........................................269

Centronics Parallel Interface.................................................................270

Centronics Parallel Interface Signals .............................................271

IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface.................................................................272

Compatibility Mode.........................................................................272

Nibble Mode ...................................................................................272

Byte Mode ......................................................................................272

Signals ...........................................................................................273

Terminating Resistor Configurations..............................................275

RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces ..................................................276

RS-232 ...........................................................................................277

RS-422 ...........................................................................................278

6 Reprogramming the Security Key....................... 279

Reprogramming The Security Key........................................................279

How To Program The Security Key................................................279

7 Troubleshooting .................................................. 281

Cleaning Requirements ........................................................................281

Exterior Cleaning............................................................................281

Interior Cleaning.............................................................................282

Diagnosing Problems............................................................................284

Bar Code Verification .....................................................................284

Printing A Hex Dump......................................................................285

Fault Messages..............................................................................286

A Printer Specifications.......................................... 317

Ribbon Cartridge Specifications ...........................................................317

Paper Specifications.............................................................................317

Labels ...................................................................................................318

Printer Weight And Dimensions............................................................318

Environmental Characteristics..............................................................318

Acoustic Noise Level ............................................................................319

Energy Star...........................................................................................319

Electrical Characteristics ......................................................................320

Interfaces..............................................................................................321

Printing Rates .......................................................................................321

Table of Contents

B ASCII Character Set........................................... 323

C Zero Tear Printer................................................ 325

Overview...............................................................................................325

Operation ..............................................................................................326

Position The Paper Input And Adjust The Paper Guides ...............326

Load Paper.....................................................................................328

Position The Paper Out Sensor .....................................................330

Set The Tear Bar Distance.............................................................331

Set The Top Of Form .....................................................................332

ZTP SETTINGS Menu ..........................................................................333

Performance Limitations .......................................................................334

D Customer Support.............................................. 337

Printronix Customer Support Center.....................................................337

Printronix Supplies Department ............................................................337

Corporate Offices..................................................................................338

E Communication Notices ..................................... 339

Notices..................................................................................................339

Energy Star...........................................................................................341

Communication Statements..................................................................341

Software License Agreement................................................................346

Table of Contents

Introduction

Printer Overview

This chapter provides a general overview of your printer and the conventions

used within this manual.

Printronix P7000 Cartridge Ribbon Printers (CRP)

Series

Printronix

has been the global leader in industrial printing solutions for over

30 years, earning a reputation for designing and manufacturing leading edge

products and delivering them to market with unsurpassed service and

support.

The Printronix P7000™ Line Matrix Printing Platform extends the series of

technology innovations that cement Printronix’s leadership position. Line

matrix printing is Printronix’s flagship technology, and it remains the

workhorse solution for supply-chain and back-office printing applications

because of its reliability, lower cost of ownership and flexibility of printing

applications.

•

Most reliable printer ever – provides more up time and lower operating

costs

•

Ultra capacity ribbons – deliver darker image, last longer, and costs less

to operate than other print technologies

•

Integrated print management system – provides precise control over print

quality, print costs, and job planning

•

Cabinet or Pedestal styles – best user access and forms handling

flexibility

•

Unsurpassed ease of use – simplifies operation and enhances

productivity

Chapter 1

Printer Overview

There are three printer configurations:

Enclosed Cabinet (P72XX)

•

The enclosed cabinet models provide for near silent operation, making

these printers perfectly suitable for use in the quietest of office

environments.

•

Provides the best paper handling for large print runs. All paper input and

output is contained inside the cabinet and protected from bumping and

contamination.

•

Highly effective combination of moveable fences and chains allows for

precise stacking all the way up to a full box of paper.

•

For tougher forms that tend not to refold well, a SureStak power stacker

option is available for the enclosed cabinet models.

•

Available in four print speeds – 500 line per minute, 1000 line per minute,

1500 line per minute, 2000 line per minute and HD models.

Pedestal (P70XX)

•

The pedestal model has a clamshell design that allows easy access to all

controls providing faster ribbon replacements and easier paper loading

•

Oversized casters are standard making movement easy.

•

Versatility to configure the paper path for either top or rear exit.

•

Using the top paper exit, this printer is ideal for short print runs and easy

access to output

•

Available in three print speeds – 500 line per minute, 1000 line per

minute, 1500 line per minute and HD models.

Zero Tear Pedestal (P70XXZT)

•

Special push tractor configuration enables printing from the very first to

the very last line of a form and then tear-off with no forms lost

•

The elimination of wasted forms between jobs can yield significant

savings.

•

An ideal solution for supply-chain and back-office applications.

•

Available in three print speeds – 500 line per minute, 1000 line per

minute, 1500 line per minute and HD models.

Consumable Monitoring With PrintNet Enterprise

The Integrated Print Management System works with PrintNet Enterprise

(PNE). PNE allows a system administrator to remotely view the current

consumable status of all printers. PNE can be configured to deliver alerts on

all consumable warnings. When a ribbon reaches the low state, PNE notifies

the system administrator remotely via an automated e-mail alert of the low

condition. This allows corrective action to be taken before the ribbon reaches

its end of life. If the ribbon is not changed, an alert will again be initiated once

the ribbon reaches the 0% end point. Refer to your PrintNet Enterprise

Remote Management Software manual for details.

Graphics Enhancements

The IGP/PGL and IGP/VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms,

generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and create other graphics.

Alphanumeric and bar code data are added as the form is printed.

These emulations are available as factory-installed or field-installed options.

For more information, contact your authorized service representative.

Taking Care Of Your Printer

Your printer will produce high print quality jobs if it is well taken care of.

Periodic cleaning, handling the printer properly, and using the correct printer

supplies such as ribbon and paper ensures optimum performance. Chapter 7

explains how to clean the printer, and printer supplies are listed in

Appendix A.

Conventions In This Manual

Control panel keys and indicators are highlighted in UPPERCASE BOLD

PRINT.

Example: Press the CANCEL key, then press the ON LINE/CLEAR key.

Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

Example: Press the ON LINE/CLEAR key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.

The + (plus) symbol represents key combinations.

Example: “Press U + V” means press the U (UP) key and the V (DOWN)

key at the same time.

Chapter 1

Warnings And Special Information

Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:

WARNING

A warning notice calls attention to a condition that could harm you.

CAUTION

A caution notice calls attention to a condition that could damage the

printer.

IMPORTANT

Information vital to proper operation of the printer.

NOTE: A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and

maintenance.

Related Documents

•

Quick Reference Guide — Explains how to set up the printer for basic

operation (load ribbon cartridge and media, and clear paper jams).

•

Maintenance Manual — Explains how to maintain and repair the line

matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance.

•

ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides host control codes

and character sets for the ANSI emulation.

•

Character Sets Reference Manual — Information about and examples of

the character sets available in line matrix printers.

•

Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual — Covers the host control

codes and character sets for the Coax and Twinax emulations.

•

Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol

Converter Option — Covers the host control codes and character sets for

the Coax and Twinax Simple Protocol Converter emulations.

•

External Network Interface Card User’s Manual — Information about

network protocols, configuration, and operation.

•

IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used

with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature.

•

IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used

with the optional Code V

emulation enhancement feature.

•

Integrated Network Interface Card User's Manual — Information about

network protocols, configuration, and operation.

•

IPDS Twinax Emulation Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides an

overview of Intelligent Printer Data Stream

(IPDS) features, commands,

and diagnostics.

•

LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual — Covers the host

control codes for the LinePrinter Plus emulation.

Printronix Customer Support Center

Contact Information

Printronix Customer Support Center

IMPORTANT

Please have the following information available prior to calling the

Printronix Customer Support Center:

•

Model number

•

Serial number (located on the back of the printer)

•

Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)

•

Configuration printout (Press PRT CONFIG on the control panel, then

press ENTER)

•

Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?

•

Description of the problem (be specific)

•

Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing of these

samples may be required)

Americas (714) 368-2686

Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 410

Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114

China (86) 800-999-6836

http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx

Printronix Supplies Department

Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.

Americas (800) 733-1900

Europe, Middle East, and Africa 33 (0) 1 46 25 19 07

Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4116

or (65) 6548 4182

China (86) 400-886-5598

India (800) 102-7869

http://www.printronix.com/public/supplies/default.aspx

Chapter 1

Contact Information

Corporate Offices

Printronix, Inc.

15345 Barranca Parkway

Irvine, CA 92618

U.S.A.

Phone: (714) 368-2300

Fax: (714) 368-2600

Printronix Inc.

c/o Printronix Nederland BV

Bijsterhuizen 11-38

6546 AS Nijmegen

The Netherlands

Phone: (31) 24 6489489

Fax: (31) 24 6489499

Printronix Schweiz GmbH

42 Changi South Street 1

Changi South Industrial Estate

Singapore 486763

Phone: (65) 6542 0110

Fax: (65) 6546 1588

Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd

22F, Eton Building East

No.555, Pudong Av.

Shanghai City, 200120, P R China

Phone: (86) 400 886 5598

Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564

Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com

Setting Up The Printer

Before You Begin

Read this chapter carefully before installing and operating the printer. The

printer is easy to install. However, for your safety and to protect valuable

equipment, perform all the procedures in this chapter in the order presented.

Power Requirements

The printer must be connected to a power outlet that supplies 88 to 270 volts

AC. The printer automatically senses and adjusts itself to conform to the

correct voltage range.

Primary circuit protection is provided by the power switch, which is also a

circuit breaker. Consult an electrician if printer operation affects local

electrical lines.

IMPORTANT

Printer power should be supplied from a separate AC circuit protected

at 10 amperes for 100 - 120 volts or 5 amperes for 200 - 240 volts at 50 or

60 Hertz.

Select A Site

Select a printer site that meets all of the following requirements:

•

Permits complete opening of the printer cover and doors.

•

For cabinet models, allows at least three feet of clearance behind the

printer. (This permits air to circulate freely around the printer and provides

access to the paper stacking area.)

•

Has a standard power outlet that supplies 88-135 Volts AC or

178-270 Volts AC power, at 47 to 63 Hz.

•

Is relatively dust-free.

•

Has a temperature range of 10°

to 40° C (50° F to 104° F) and a

relative humidity from 15% to 90% non-condensing.

•

Is located within the maximum allowable cable length to the host

computer. This distance depends on the type of interface you plan to use,

as shown in Table 1.

Chapter 2

Printer Dimensions

Figure 1. Printer Dimensions - Cabinet Model

Table 1. Maximum Interface Connection Cable Length

Interface Type Maximum Cable Length

Centronics Parallel 5 meters (15 feet)

Dataproducts Parallel 12 meters (40 feet)

IEEE 1284 Parallel 10 meters (32 feet)

Serial RS-232 15 meters (50 feet)

Serial RS-422 1220 meters (4000 feet)

Coax 1500 meters (4920 feet)

Twinax 1500 meters (4920 feet)

Twinax (shielded cable) 1500 meters (4920 feet)

Twisted Pair / Type 3 300 meters (985 feet)

Ethernet 10/100Base-T 100 meters (328 feet)

183468b

27.0 in

(68.84 cm)

83.0 in

(210.8 cm)

29.0 in

(73.7 cm)

27.0 in

(68.6 cm)

27.0 in

(68.6 cm)

41.0 in

(104 cm) 57.5 in

(146.1 cm)

Figure 2. Printer Dimensions - Cabinet Model with Paper Stacker

183469b

27.0 in

(68.6 cm)

83.0 in

(210.8 cm)

32.5 in

(82.6 cm)

27.0 in

(68.6 cm)

27.0 in

(68.6 cm)

32.0 in

(81.3 cm)

42.5 in

(107.8 cm)

59.0 in

(149.9 cm)

Chapter 2

Printer Dimensions

Figure 3. Printer Dimensions - Pedestal Model

TOF

183882a

25 in.

(63.5 cm)

10.5 in.

(26.67 cm.)

48.0 in.

(122 cm)

30 in.

(76.2 cm.)

24.6 in.

(62.48 cm)

Printer Component Locations

Figure 4. Printer Component Locations

TOF

183871 REV A

183871a

Ribbon

Cartridge

Ribbon

Tension Knob

Air Shroud

Assembly

Tab (2)

Tab

Slot (2)

Blue Tractor

Lock (2)

Paper

Support (2)

Tractor (2)

Vertical

Position Knob

Platen Lever

Splined Shaft

Platen Stop

Hammer Bank

Cover and

Ribbon Mask

Ribbon Cartridge

Interface

Printer Component Locations

Chapter 2

Printer Component Locations

Operating The Printer

Powering On The Printer

When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. The default power-up

state is online. When the self-test completes and the software has initialized

successfully, the status indicator light turns on, indicating the printer is online.

The default value of the type of emulation you have installed appears in the

upper right corner of the display. The ribbon life remaining is shown on the

second line.

If there is a fault during the self-test, the status indicator flashes and a specific

fault message appears on the display (such as “LOAD PAPER”). The alarm

also sounds if it is configured to do so. See “ LCD Message Troubleshooting

Table” on page 287 for information on fault messages and solutions.

Operating Modes

Online. In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the

host. Pressing the ON LINE key toggles the printer from online to offline

mode. The status indicator is lit in online mode.

Offline. In offline mode, you can perform operator functions, such as loading

paper and setting top-of-form. You can also move within the printer

configuration menus. Pressing the ON LINE/CLEAR key toggles the printer

from offline to online mode. The status indicator is off in offline mode.

Fault. In fault mode, a condition exists which must be cleared before printing

can continue. The status indicator flashes, the alarm beeps (if configured to

sound), and a descriptive fault message displays.

The current operating mode can be selected via control panel keys or can

result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.

Chapter 3

The Control Panel

Figure 5 shows the keys, displays, and indicators as they appear on the

control panel. The following section provides the descriptions, and functions

of the control panel keys.

Key combinations are indicated with the plus (+) sign. For example, “Press U

+ V” means to press the U key and the V key at the same time.

Figure 5. Control Panel

Control Panel Keys

ON LINE / CLEAR

Toggles the printer between online and offline modes. If a fault condition

exists, pressing this key will clear the fault message and return the printer

from fault mode to offline mode.

NOTE: If the fault condition is not corrected before pressing this key, the fault

message will reappear when attempting to place the printer online.

SET TOF

PRT CONFIG

JOB SELECT ENTER ON LINE/

CLEAR PAPER

ADVANCE VIEW/EJECT CANCEL

Status Indicator

Circular

Pad

ONLINE <PGL>

RIBBON LIFE 100%

Emulation

Ribbon Life

Indicator

Message Display

Control Panel Keys

PAPER ADVANCE

Performs advance to top-of-form, as defined by the current active form length.

The key works both online and offline.

•

If online with data in the printer buffer, the data will print and then the

paper will move to the next top-of-form.

•

In the fault state, PAPER ADVANCE will advance the paper. The first

press moves to the top of the next available form. All subsequent presses

advances one forms length as defined by the current active forms length.

NOTE:

VIEW / EJECT

When the printer is online or offline, pressing this key executes the view or

eject function, depending on whether the printer is a cabinet or a pedestal (or

zero tear pedestal).

If online with data in the printer buffer, the data prints and the key functions as

described below.

If in a fault state, this key will be ignored.

•

View Function — for cabinet models, pressing the

VIEW/EJECT key moves the last data printed to the tractor area for

viewing. While in the view state, the message "Printer in View" displays,

pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1/

72 inch increments. This is done to align the image within a pre-printed

form, for example. Refer to the UP and DOWN key functions for additional

details on the microstep feature. Pressing VIEW/EJECT a second time

moves the paper back to the adjusted print position.

•

Eject Function — for pedestal models, when the VIEW/EJECT key is

pressed, the bottom of the last printed form will move to the tear bar

position. The message "READY TO TEAR/EJECT To Return" displays.

While in this position, pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the

paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. Refer to the Up and Down key

functions for additional details on the microstep feature. When the VIEW/

EJECT key is pressed a second time, the printer will move the paper to

enable printing on the next available form.

CANCEL

In offline mode, this key cancels all data in the print buffer, if enabled in the

“ADVANCED USER Menu” (see page 254). The print buffer is cleared without

printing any of the data and the current paper position is set as the top-of-

form. If this function is disabled, the CANCEL key will be ignored.

NOTE: 1. Use of this key will cause loss of data.

2. For OpenPrint products, pressing the CANCEL key advances the

paper to the next TOF.

Chapter 3

The Control Panel

SET TOF

Sets the top-of-form on the printer. This key is active only when the printer is

offline and will not operate if the printer is in a fault condition. The paper

moves down to the print position and aligns to the top-of-form. Refer to the

Quick Setup Guide for complete instructions on how to set the top-of-form.

NOTE: If there is any data in the buffer, the paper will move to the last print

position.

PRT CONFIG

In offline mode, PRT CONFIG prints the current short configuration. This key

requires a confirmation with the ENTER key; pressing any other key will exit

from this function. See “The Configuration Menus” on page 47 for an

explanation of configuration menus.

JOB SELECT

In offline mode, this key allows for fast selection of any of the previously

stored configurations. Pressing this key causes the printer to cycle through

the following messages: Load Config., Factory Config, Load Config 1, Load

Config 2, Load Config 3,...,Load Config 8.

ENTER

When navigating the configuration menus, ENTER selects the currently

displayed option value as the active value. An asterisk (*) appears next to the

active value on the display. ENTER is also used for starting and stopping

printer tests and generating a configuration printout.

NOTE: The ENTER key must be unlocked in order to function.

See UP + DOWN, below.

The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a

key combination other than U + V (see page 259).

UP or DOWN (

)

Moves up or down between levels in the configuration menus and makes

vertical forms adjustment. After pressing VIEW, press U or V to adjust the

paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments for fine vertical forms alignment.

When the printer is in offline mode, press U or V to move through levels in

the configuration menus.

Control Panel Keys

UP + DOWN (U + V)

Locks and unlocks the ENTER key.

NOTE: The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a

key combination other than U + V (see page 259).

PREV or NEXT (Y or Z)

Moves between the options on the current level of configuration menu. In the

configuration menu, press

to scroll backward or press Z

to scroll forward

through the menu selections on the same level.

PREV + NEXT ( Y + Z)

When both keys are pressed simultaneously, the printer will reset to the

power-up configuration and reset its internal state (in offline mode).

U + ON LINE (IPDS Emulation only)

In offline mode, press U + ON LINE. If there is data in the printer buffer, the

printer will be placed in online mode, print one page, and return to the offline

mode. This action can be repeated until the end of a print job. Only one page

prints each time you press U + ON LINE. If there is no data in the printer

buffer, the printer is placed in online mode.

In the fault state, U + ON LINE does not work.

U + PAPER ADVANCE (IPDS Emulation only)

In offline mode, press U + PAPER ADVANCE. The printer will perform a

reverse linefeed. If you hold down the U + PAPER ADVANCE keys for longer

than 1/2 second, the printer moves to the previous top-of-form position. If

there is data in the printer buffer, the data does not print.

In the fault state, U + PAPER ADVANCE does not work.

U + VIEW (IPDS Emulation only)

In offline mode, press U + VIEW/EJECT. If there is data in the IPDS printer

buffer, the printer will be placed in online mode, print one line, and return to

offline mode. This action can be repeated until the end of the job. This

function prints only one line of text. If the data is not text, only 1/6 inch prints.

If there is no data in the printer buffer, the printer is placed in online mode for

one second and then returns to offline mode.

In the fault state, U + VIEW does not work.

Ribbon Life Indicator

The second line of the LCD displays the remaining life of the currently

installed ribbon. The default settings for this feature should match the

requirements for most applications; no special user setup is needed. If your

particular application requires darker printing or can tolerate lighter printing,

the ribbon end point can be adjusted as appropriate. Please refer “Ribbon

End Point” on page 83.

Chapter 3

The Control Panel

Cancel A Print Job

The procedure to cancel a print job depends on the printer emulation and your

application software. Contact your system administrator for additional

information.

1. If the printer is online, press

(

ON LINE/CLEAR) to place the printer in

offline mode.

2. From the host system, stop the print job.

NOTE: If the print job is not stopped from the host system before pressing

(

CANCEL), the print job continues with data missing when the

printer returns to online mode. Exercise caution to prevent unwanted

data loss occurrences, as this function deletes unprinted data in the

printer. This function is active only in offline mode; the purpose of this

function is to eliminate the necessity of printing unwanted data when

print jobs are canceled.

3. Press

(

CANCEL).

NOTE: You may need to enable the Cancel option on the front panel.

See “ADVANCED USER Menu” on page 254 for details.

4. Set the top-of-form. Refer to the Quick Reference Guide.

Reload Paper

Operational Procedures

This section contains routine printer operating procedures on how to:

•

reload paper

•

unload paper

Reload Paper

Do this procedure when “LOAD PAPER” displays. (This message occurs

when the last sheet of paper passes through the paper slot.) This procedure

reloads paper without removing the last sheet of the old paper supply, while

retaining the current top-of-form setting.

Figure 6. Paper Slot Location

1. Raise the printer cover. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.

(See Figure 4 on page 21 for the location of the lever.)

2. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to turn off the alarm. Do not open the tractor

doors or remove the existing paper.

3. For cabinet models, open the front door. Align the paper supply with the

label on the floor. Ensure the paper pulls freely from the box.

4. Feed the paper up through the paper slot (see Figure 6). It may be easier

to feed one corner of the new paper up through the slot first. When this

corner can be grasped from the top, rotate the paper back to the normal

position.

NOTE: If you are using thick, multi-part forms and are unable to load the new

paper over the existing paper, go to step 15.

5. Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down and through the paper

slot.

183440b

183439b

Paper

Slot

Cabinet Model Pedestal Model

Paper Slot

Metal Paper Guide

(P7220 and P7200HD)

Wire

Guide (2)

Chapter 3

Operational Procedures

Figure 7. Loading New Paper into the Printer

6. Pull the new paper above and behind the ribbon mask, but in front of the

existing paper. See Figure 4 on page 21 for the ribbon mask location.

If necessary, gently press the existing paper back.

7. Align the top edge of the new paper with the top perforation of the existing

paper.

8. Load the new paper over the existing paper. Open and load the tractors

one at a time to prevent the paper from slipping.

NOTE: Make sure that the top edge of the new paper lines up with the top

horizontal perforation of the last page.

183888a

New Paper Existing Paper

Reload Paper

Figure 8. Setting the Platen Lever

9. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the

paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-,

and 6-part paper thickness).

NOTE: If you are using the same thickness of paper, there is no need to

readjust.

10. Lower the platen lever until it stops.

11. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to remove the “LOAD PAPER” fault message

from the display.

12. Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds

properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed

sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly.

13. Close the printer top cover. Close the cabinet front door.

14. Press ON LINE/CLEAR

to place the printer in online mode and resume

printing.

183444b

183446b

Platen Lever

Vertical Position

Knob

Platen Stop

Knob

Platen

Stop

183445b

Paper Thickness

Indicator

Chapter 3

Operational Procedures

Figure 9. Paper Slots on the Printers

NOTE: Perform steps 15 to 32 only if you are unable to load the new paper

over the existing paper.

15. Open both tractor doors.

16. Remove the old paper from the tractors. Allow the paper to fall into the

paper supply area.

17. Feed the new paper up through the paper slot. Hold the paper to prevent

it from slipping down through the paper slot.

183440 REV B

183440b

183439 REV B

183439b

Paper

Slot

Cabinet Model Pedestal Model

Paper Slot

Metal Paper Guide

(P7220 and P7200HD)

Wire

Guide (2)

Reload Paper

Figure 10. Loading Paper on the Left Tractor

18. Pull the paper above and behind the ribbon mask. See Figure 4 on

page 21 for the ribbon mask location.

19. Load the paper on the left tractor.

20. Close the tractor door.

TOF

183441b

Paper

Left Tractor Door

Left Tractor Lock

Chapter 3

Operational Procedures

Figure 11. Positioning the Left Tractor to Avoid Damage

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the printer caused by printing on the platen, always

position the left tractor unit directly to the left of the “1” mark on the

paper scale.

21. Normally, you should not need to adjust the position of the left tractor.

If adjustment is necessary, unlock the left tractor by placing the tractor

lock in the middle position. Slide the tractor until it is directly to the left of

the number “1” on the paper scale and lock it. (You can also use the

paper scale to count columns.)

183442b

Paper

Paper Scale

Tractor

Splined Shaft

Tractor Lock

Reload Paper

Figure 12. Loading Paper onto the Sprockets

22. Unlock the right tractor.

23. Load the paper onto the sprockets and close the tractor door.

If necessary, slide the right tractor to remove paper slack or to adjust for

various paper widths. Then, lock the tractor.

Figure 13. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper

TOF

183443b

Tractor Lock

Tractor Door

183440b

183439 REV B

183439b

Cabinet Model Pedestal Model

Wire

Guide (2)

Paper Slot

Upper Paper

Guide

Upper Paper

Guide

Chapter 3

Operational Procedures

24. Pedestal models:

Using the vertical position knob to move the paper up, guide the paper

over the upper paper guide and through the slot to the rear of the top

cover. For pedestal models with the Quick Access Cover, refer to the

Quick Setup Guide for paper exiting options.

25. Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds

properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed

sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly.

26. Cabinet models:

Open the cabinet rear door. Make sure the paper is aligned with the label

in the output area (inside the cabinet). Close the front and rear doors.

Figure 14. Aligning the Perforation with the TOF Indicator

27. Align the top of the first print line with the TOF indicator on the tractor by

rotating the vertical position knob. For best print quality, it is

recommended that the top-of-form be set at least one print line or more

below the perforation.

NOTE: For exact positioning, press the VIEW/EJECT key to move the last

data printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in View mode

“Printer in View” displays. Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to move

the paper vertically in small increments. Pressing the VIEW/EJECT

key a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print

position. The key works both online and offline provided that the

printer is in View mode. (This procedure is applicable for both the

cabinet and pedestal models.)

TOF

183967a

TOF Indicator

Perforation

Vertical

Position

Knob

Reload Paper

Figure 15. Adjusting the Platen Lever

28. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the

paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-,

and 6-part paper thickness. Adjust until you have the desired print

quality).

NOTE: The platen stop allows you to set an optimum and consistent

thickness that is not affected when opening and closing the platen

lever.

29. Lower the platen lever until it stops.

30. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to clear any fault messages (such as “LOAD

PAPER”) from the LCD.

31. Press SET TOF. The top-of-form you have set moves down to the print

position. If there is data in the buffer, the paper moves forward to the last

print position on the next page.

32. Press ON LINE/CLEAR and close the printer cover.

183444 REV B

183444b

183446b

Platen Lever

Vertical Position

Knob

Platen Stop

Knob

Platen

Stop

183445b

Paper Thickness

Indicator

Chapter 3

Operational Procedures

Unload Paper

1. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to place the printer in offline mode and open the

printer cover.

2. For cabinet models, open the cabinet rear door. For models with the

power stacker installed, press the STACKER UP key on the rear control

panel.

Figure 16. Unloading the Paper from the Printer

3. Tear off the paper at the perforation.

4. Allow the paper to fall to the back of the printer and into the paper

stacking area.

5. For pedestal models, remove the stacked paper from the paper tray.

TOF

183477b

Paper

Perforation

Unload Paper

Figure 17. Removing Stacked Paper from the Printer

6. For cabinet models, remove the stacked paper from the rear cabinet floor.

For cabinet models with the power stacker installed, remove the paper

from the wire paper tent and press the STACKER DOWN key to lower the

stacker mechanism.

7. Close the cabinet rear door.

183478b

Paper

Power Stacker

Chapter 3

Operational Procedures

Figure 18. Completely Removing the Paper

8. To completely remove the paper from the printer:

a. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go and open both tractor doors.

CAUTION

Be careful when pulling any paper backward through the paper path,

especially when using a label stock. If you are not careful, labels can

detach and adhere to the printer within the paper path, where only an

authorized service representative can remove them.

b. Open the cabinet front door.

c. Gently pull the paper down through the paper slot. Allow the paper to

fall into the paper supply area.

d. Remove the paper from the paper supply area.

183904a

Platen Lever

Tractor Door

Output Darkness

Integrated Print Management System

The P7000 has a new feature that automatically monitors and communicates

the status of the ribbon life to help the operator know when to change ribbons.

Using an ink delivery system called the Cartridge Ribbon System (CRS), the

printer can automatically detect when a new or used ribbon is loaded, and all

ribbon properties. The ribbon is contained in a plastic box (the cartridge) and

feeds only in one direction. The CRS contains an interface board that allows

communication between the printer and the cartridge. Using the CRS, the

P7000 automatically detects when a new or used ribbon is installed and

determines the ribbon’s length, ink color, and expected yield. The ribbon life,

starting from 100% when new and decreasing to 0% when depleted, is always

displayed on the control panel. See Figure 5 on page 24.

When the ribbon life reaches 2%, a warning message “RIBBON UNDER 2%/

Change RBN soon” appears on the control panel display. The control panel

status indicator lamp flashes. The printer will continue printing in this condition

until the ribbon life reaches 0% at which time, printing will stop. The ribbon

may be changed at any time while the printer is in the “RBN END POINT/

Change Ribbon” condition without losing data in the printer’s buffer. If a new

ribbon is loaded, the system automatically detects the change, clears the

condition when the platen is closed, and restarts the life at 100%. If a partially

used ribbon is loaded, the system continues the life at the percentage

indicated for the used ribbon.

You may also resume printing for approximately two more minutes without

changing the ribbon by pressing the ON LINE/CLEAR key twice. This may be

done as many times as needed to complete the job in progress.

Ribbon usage information is calculated by maintaining a count of impressions

(dots) that is stored on the ribbon cartridge and updated periodically so that

the cartridge can be used on a different printer with the information intact. This

allows the system administrator to have precise control over print quality and

consumable costs. The accurate presentation of available ribbon life allows

for efficient planning of print jobs. For example, if the displayed ribbon life

were low, you can install a new ribbon before printing a large print job.

Output Darkness

By default the system is configured to meet most user requirements.

However, some applications require that the output remains darker than the

nominal set point while some applications are less critical and could tolerate a

lighter final image. The system can easily adjust to this variability. A setting

under the Printer Control menu is available that allows the user to adjust the

final output. The range is as follows:

Normal (Default)

Darker +1 through +6

Lighter -1 through -10

The ribbon life indicator always cycles between 100% and 0%, but if a darker

setting is selected, zero will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is

selected, the system will extend the amount of printing it takes to reach zero.

Chapter 3

Integrated Print Management System

Loading a Used Ribbon Cartridge

You can take the ribbon cartridge off the printer and reload it at a later time.

The ribbon life gauge automatically updates to reflect the correct remaining

capacity.

NOTE: Since the ribbon usage information is stored on the ribbon cartridge,

you can reload a partially used cartridge onto a different printer.

Lighter Or Darker Print

The ribbon life value as determined by the Integrated Print Management

System is factory set so that the image quality at the end of the ribbon life is

as good as it was when the ribbon was new. You may adjust the ribbon end

point for a lighter or darker image as required for your printing needs.

See “PRINTER CONTROL Menu” on page 251.

Changing Ribbon Cartridge

Before changing the ribbon cartridge, determine whether at the end of ribbon

life if you want to make the print lighter (extend the ribbon life) or darker

(shorten the ribbon life). If you want to make the print lighter or darker, go to

“Ribbon End Point” on page 83 and follow the procedures for adjusting the

image density. If you are satisfied with the print darkness, continue with the

following steps.

NOTE: Ribbon cartridge instructions and illustrations shown in the following

section are for the pedestal model. Follow the same procedures for

the cabinet model.

Figure 19. Preparing to Load the Ribbon

1. Open the printer cover.

2. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go.

3. Close the tractor doors.

4. Remove the old ribbon cartridge and discard properly.

TOF

183816a

Blue Tractor

Door (2)

Platen Lever

Chapter 3

Integrated Print Management System

Figure 20. Installing the Ribbon Cartridge

5. Remove the ribbon slack on the new ribbon cartridge by turning the

ribbon tension knob clockwise.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ribbon tension knob counterclockwise. This could

damage the ribbon cartridge.

6. Hold the cartridge at an angle, so that the rear side nearest you is lower

than the side with the ribbon. Find the two tabs on the outside of the

cartridge and place them into the corresponding slots on the air shroud

assembly (see Figure 20).

TOF

183871a

Ribbon

Cartridge

Ribbon

Tension Knob

Air Shroud

Assembly

Tab (2)

Tab Slot (2)

Changing Ribbon Cartridge

Figure 21. The Ribbon Cartridge Snapped in Place

7. Rock the cartridge downward, making sure that the ribbon goes between

the guide and the mask (see Figure 21). You will feel it snap into place.

CAUTION

Make sure that the ribbon does not twist or fold over.

8. Turn the ribbon tension knob clockwise a few times to make sure the

ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path.

9. Close the platen lever.

10. Close the printer top cover.

11. Press the

(

ON LINE/CLEAR) key twice to return the printer to

operation.

TOF

183872a

TOF

183874a

Ribbon

Cartridge

Hammerbank

Cover

Ribbon Mask

Ribbon Cartridge

Ribbon

Ribbon Tension Knob

Chapter 3

Integrated Print Management System

The Configuration Menus

Configuration Overview

To print data, the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands

received from the host computer. Configuration is the process of matching the

printer's operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to

specific tasks, such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper.

The characteristics which define the printer's response to signals and

commands received from the host computer are called configuration

parameters.

You can configure the printer using the configuration menus and the control

panel or by sending control codes in the data stream from a host computer

attached to the printer. This chapter provides an introduction to configuring

the printer and includes the configuration menus available (depending on

which emulation you have installed in the printer).

IMPORTANT

Configuration directly affects printer operation. Do not change the

configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the

procedures in this chapter.

Main Menu

The Main Menu section (page 63) is organized based on the following

firmware types:

1. P7000 STD Firmware (Coax/Twinax/IPDS/PGL/VGL/LP+)

2. P7000 TN Firmware (TN/PGL/VGL/LP+)

3. P7000 PCL-II Firmware (PCL-II/PGL/VGL/LP+)

4. P7000 LG Firmware (LG/PGL/VGL/LP+)

5. P7000 ANSI Firmware (ANSI/PGL/VGL/LP+)

6. OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS/PGL/VGL/LP+)

7. OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware (PS)

Chapter 4

Configuration Overview

Changing Parameter Settings

You may change a printer parameter setting, such as line spacing or forms

length, either by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation

control codes in the data stream from a host attached to the printer. The

control panel allows you to configure the printer’s resident set of configuration

menus. An example procedure for using the control panel to change

parameter settings begins on page 50.

When control codes are sent from a host attached to the printer, they override

control panel settings. For example, if you set the line spacing to 6 lpi with the

control panel, and application software later changes this to 8 lpi with a control

code, the control code overrides the control panel setting.

Saving Parameter Settings

The parameter settings that you have changed can be permanently stored in

the printer’s memory as a configuration. See “Auto Save Configuration” on

page 53 and “Saving Your New Configuration” on page 53.

You may also save your new configurations using the PTX_SETUP command

host control code. See your LinePrinter Plus Programmer’s Reference

Manual for details.

Default And Custom Configurations

A configuration consists of a group of parameter settings, such as line

spacing, forms length, etc. Your printer provides a fixed default configuration

and allows you to define several custom configurations for use with particular

print jobs. The factory default configuration can be loaded, but it cannot be

altered.

Eight configurations can be modified for unique print job requirements. The

“Save Config.” option allows you to save eight groups of parameter settings in

memory as custom configurations numbered from 1 through 8. An

explanation on how to save a set of parameter values as a custom

configuration using the “Save Config.” menu option begins on page 53.

Navigating the Menus

To manipulate configurations review the following instructions about

navigating through the menus.

You must be offline to move within the menus.

To experiment with navigating the menus, use the example on the next page

as a tutorial.

Press to toggle between ONLINE and OFFLINE. Menus are

accessed with the printer offline.

Press to move up or down through the menu levels.

Press to scroll through the available choices on a chosen

level.

Press to confirm selection.

Press to lock and unlock the ENTER key. The ENTER key is

locked by default to prevent you from accidentally changing

the printer configuration. The lock and unlock function can be

configured to be other than

U + V

(See “Set Lock Key” on

page 259.)

ON LINE/CLEAR

ENTER

Chapter 4

Configuration Overview

Changing Parameters Example

A configuration consists of several parameters. The default factory

configuration has a starting set of parameters. In the configuration menu

above, and in all the configuration menus in this chapter, the factory default

values are indicated by an asterisk (*).

Your print jobs may require parameter values which vary from the default

settings. This section provides an example procedure for changing individual

parameter values.

. . .

OFFLINE

QUICK

SETUP CONFIG.

CONTROL

Load

Config.

Save

Config.

Power-Up

Config.

Delete

Config.

Protect

Configs.

2-8

Current Short*

Current Full

Factory

Power-Up

All

1-8

Factory*

1-8

2-8

Disable*

Enable

* = Factory Default

Name

Configs

1-8

Factory*

1-8

Reset Cfg

Names

2-8

All

Auto

Save

Enable*

Disable

Changing Parameters Example

The following procedure shows how to change and save the settings for the

Barcode Quality and Language options. Use these guidelines to navigate the

configuration menus and change other parameters.

Step Press LCD Notes

1. Make sure the printer is on.

2. OFFLINE

QUICK SETUP

3. ENTER SWITCH

UNLOCKED

Allows you to make configuration changes.

OFFLINE

QUICK SETUP

4. OFFLINE

PRINTER CONTROL

5. PRINTER CONTROL

Ribbon End Point

6. PRINTER CONTROL

Barcode Quality

7. Barcode Quality

Dark*

8. Barcode Quality

Draft

Cycle through the choices.

9. Barcode Quality

Draft*

The * indicates this choice is active.

ON LINE/CLEAR

UNTIL

ENTER

Chapter 4

Configuration Overview

10. PRINTER CONTROL

Barcode Quality

11. PRINTER CONTROL

Display Language

12. Display Language

English*

13. Display Language

Spanish

Press until the desired parameter displays.

14. Display Language

Spanish*

The * indicates this choice is active.

15. ENTER SWITCH

LOCKED

Locks the ENTER key.

16. ENTER = Save

ONLINE = No Save

Press ENTER to automatically save

configuration changes. Press ONLINE to

continue without saving.

17A. Cfg = 1*

= Power-Up Cfg

Configuration changes have been saved as

Configuration 1, and will be set as the

Power-Up config. The printer will then be

brought online.

17B. ONLINE

Ribbon Life = 100%

Places the printer online without

permanently saving the configuration

changes.

18. The printer is ready for operation

Step Press LCD Notes

UNTIL

ENTER

ON LINE/CLEAR

ENTER

ON LINE/CLEAR

Auto Save Configuration

After any changes are made to the Factory Default configuration menu items,

you will be prompted to save the changes to “Config #” when you place the

printer online. “#” represents the next available unassigned configuration

number. When prompted, press one of the following:

•

Enter. Saves to Config 1 or the next available Config, and becomes the

power-up config.

•

Online. Changes will be implemented but saved only temporarily until

deliberately saved as a new configuration or until you power off the

printer. All changes will be lost when you power off the printer.

Saving Your New Configuration

The Save Config. option allows you to save up to eight custom configurations

to meet different print job requirements. Once you have changed all of the

necessary parameters, you may save them as a numbered configuration

(Example 1 on page 54) or a named configuration (Example 2 on page 56)

that can be stored and loaded later for future use. If you do not save your

configuration using the Auto Save, or this option, all of your parameter

changes will be erased when you power off the printer.

Once you have saved a custom configuration using this option, it will not be

lost if you power off the printer. You can load a configuration for a specific

print job (see “Load Config.” on page 85). You can also modify and resave it.

You may want to print your configurations (see “Print Config.” on page 85)

and store them in a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet. If the

Protect Configs. parameter is enabled and you try to resave an existing

configuration, the new configuration will not be saved until the existing

configuration has been deleted (see “Delete Config.” on page 86).

NOTE: Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously

selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved.

Chapter 4

Configuration Overview

Example 1

This example shows how to save a configuration as a numbered

configuration, then later print it.

Step Press LCD Notes

1. Make sure the printer is on.

2. OFFLINE

QUICK SETUP

3. ENTER SWITCH

UNLOCKED

Allows you to make configuration changes.

OFFLINE

QUICK SETUP

4. OFFLINE

CONFIG. CONTROL

5. CONFIG. CONTROL

Load Config.

6. CONFIG. CONTROL

Save Config.

7. Save Config.

8. Save Config.

Cycle through the choices.

9. Save Config.

The * indicates this choice is active.

ON LINE/CLEAR

UNTIL

ENTER

Saving Your New Configuration

NOTE: We recommend that you print the configuration. To print the configuration go to Step 9. To skip this

procedure and resume printer operation, go to Step 14.

10. CONFIG. CONTROL

Save Config.

11. CONFIG. CONTROL

Print Config.

12. Print Config.

Current

13. Print Config.

Press until the desired parameter displays.

14. OFFLINE

CONFIG. CONTROL

The selected configuration is printed.

15. ENTER SWITCH

LOCKED

Locks the ENTER key.

16. ONLINE

Ribbon Life = 100%

17. If you printed out the configuration, store it in a safe place. The printer is ready for operation.

Step Press LCD Notes

UNTIL

ENTER

ON LINE/CLEAR

Chapter 4

Configuration Overview

Example 2

This example shows how to save a configuration as a named configuration.

Step Press LCD Notes

1. Make sure the printer is on.

2. OFFLINE

QUICK SETUP

3. ENTER SWITCH

UNLOCKED

Allows you to make configuration changes.

OFFLINE

QUICK SETUP

4. OFFLINE

CONFIG. CONTROL

5. CONFIG. CONTROL

Load Config.

6. CONFIG. CONTROL

Name Configs.

7. Name Configs.

The LCD flashes.

8. Name Configs

You will rename config 2.

9. 2

10. 2

Cycle through the choices until “T” displays.

ON LINE/CLEAR

UNTIL

Saving Your New Configuration

11. 2

Saves the first character.

12. 2

Cycle through the choices until “E” displays.

13. 2

TE_

Saves the second character.

14. 2

TES

Cycle through the choices until “S” displays.

15. 2

TES_

Saves the third character.

16. 2

TEST

Cycle through the choices until “T” displays.

17. 2

TEST_

Saves the fourth character.

18. Name Configs

TEST

The configuration is renamed TEST.

19. CONFIG. CONTROL

Name Configs

20. CONFIG. CONTROL

Save Config.

21. Save Config.

Step Press LCD Notes

UNTIL

ENTER

UNTIL

Chapter 4

Configuration Overview

Optimizing Print Quality

LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations

You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper barcodes and

characters. Doing so, however, will decrease the printer speed.

To optimize print quality, you can change the values of the following

configuration parameters:

•

Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select “Dark” or “Draft.”

Dark prints the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. Draft prints at a

faster speed than Dark, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 252

for a written description of Bar Code Quality.)

•

Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select “Best” or “High.” Best prints

the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. High prints at a faster

speed than Best, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 197 for

the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and page 206 for a written description

of Print Quality.)

•

Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select “High.” (See page 210 for the

IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and page 217 for a written description of

Print Quality.)

22. Save Config.

TEST

TEST now appears as one of configuration

choices.

23. Saving Configuration

Save Config.

TEST*

Your configuration is saved as TEST.

24. ENTER SWITCH

LOCKED

Locks the ENTER key.

25. ONLINE

Ribbon Life = 100%

Now you have the saved configuration for later use if needed.

Step Press LCD Notes

ENTER

ON LINE/CLEAR

Optimizing Print Speed

OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations

You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper text and barcodes by

using the following configuration parameters:

•

Unidirectional (Printer Control menu): Select “Enable” for best quality

but reduced throughput (half speed).

•

Resolution (Postscript/PDF menu): Select higher values (horizontal by

vertical DPI) to get better print quality.

Optimizing Print Speed

LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations

The printer has been configured at the factory for optimal print speed. To

optimize print quality instead, you can change values for specific configuration

parameters such as Barcode Quality and Print Quality. Doing so, however,

will decrease the printer speed.

If you have optimized the printer for print quality, you can change it to optimal

speed by selecting the values as follows:

•

Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select Draft.

(See page 63 for the Configuration Main Menu, and see page 252 for a

written description of Bar Code Quality.)

•

Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing. (See

page 197 for the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and see page 206 for a

written description of Print Quality.)

•

Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select Dataprocessing. (See

page 210 for the IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and see page 217 for a

written description of Print Quality.)

Coax/Twinax Emulation

You can increase print speed by selecting the Enable mode for the Early Print

Complete configuration parameter in the Coax/Twinax Emulation. However, if

an error occurs while in Enable mode, you may lose data. For more

information, refer to “Early Print Complete” on page 227. (For the Coax/

Twinax Emulation menu, see page 124.)

OpenPrint Postscript/PDF Emulations

The printer has been configured at the Factory for optimal print quality

through the Resolution configuration parameter (Postscript/PDF menu).

However, users can reduce the horizontal, vertical, or both DPI values of this

menu to increase printer speed. The downside of using a lower DPI value is

as follows:

•

Print quality is reduced and it can be difficult to read small characters.

•

Barcodes may not get detected and optimized (barcodes are not

searched for DPI values less than 120).

Users are encouraged to use the Resolution menu to find the right

combination of Print Quality, Barcode Optimization, and Print Speed.

Chapter 4

Dynamic Menu Options

The main menus for each of the different firmware types have several

footnotes based on the possible options installed with the printer. This

includes HOST IO connectivity, various hardware/mechanical options, and

software emulations and features. The P7000 products dynamically detect

options installed and only include relevant menus for the user to configure.

The following is a description of the types of installation options and their

effect on the main menu:

•

HOST INTERFACE: Coax, Twinax, Ethernet, and WLAN related menus

are only present when the hardware is installed/enabled.

•

NETWORK SETUP: The NETWORK SETUP menu is only present when

Ethernet or WLAN is installed. The WLAN options can vary based on the

type of radio card installed with the printer. WLAN Kerberos is included

with the Symbol LA4121 radio card, WLAN LEAP is included with the

Cisco radio card, and WLAN EAP is included with the Symbol LA5127

radio card.

•

ZTP SETTINGS: The ZTP SETTINGS menu and its contents are only

included with the Zero Tear Pedestal printer.

•

DATE: This main menu is only present when the Real-Time Clock (RTC)

option is installed.

•

The Power Stacker and Auto Elevator options are also available for

configuration when the SureStak power stacker is installed.

•

QUICK SETUP: This menu is a collection of popular menus to help users

quickly configure the printer. It is also affected by the installed options.

Active Emulations

The emulations present in the printer are based on the firmware installed and

the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and do

not require any action from the user.

IMPORTANT

Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased

(see Table 2) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE

EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus.

Table 2. Available Firmware Types and Options

Firmware Type Optional

Emulations

Available

ACTIVE IGP

EMUL

ACTIVE

EMULATION

P7000 STD

IPDS

CTHI

PGL/VGL

IGP/PGL* N/A

IPDS

CTHI

IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL N/A

IPDS

CTHI

IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

P7000 TN PGL/VGL

IGP/PGL* N/A IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL N/A IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

P7000 PCL-II PGL/VGL N/A

PCL-II* PCL-II

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

NOTE:

* = Default Selection

The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is

installed.

The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and

“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+”

replaces the options.

The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION

or ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.

Chapter 4

Active Emulations

P7000 LG PGL/VGL N/A

LG* LG

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

P7000 ANSI PGL/VGL N/A

44/48XX-ANSI* 44/48XX-ANSI

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

OpenPrint P7000 STD PGL/VGL N/A

Postscript/PDF* Postscript/PDF

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

OpenPrint P7000 HD N/A NA N/A Postscript/PDF

NOTE:

* = Default Selection

The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is

installed.

The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and

“IGP/VGL & LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+”

replaces the options.

The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION

or ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.

Table 2. Available Firmware Types and Options

Firmware Type Optional

Emulations

Available

ACTIVE IGP

EMUL

ACTIVE

EMULATION

Main Menu

Brief descriptions follow for the first-level configuration menu options:

•

QUICK SETUP — These options allow quick access to the most

frequently changed or inputted parameters during the installation of the

printer.

•

ZTP SETTINGS These options allow you to set parameters for zero tear

pedestal printers.

•

CONFIG. CONTROL — These options allow you to save, print, load,

delete, name, and reset entire sets of configuration parameters.

•

HOST INTERFACE — These options allow you to select either the Serial

RS-232, Serial RS-422, Centronics

parallel, Dataproducts

parallel and

Long Lines, Ethernet

™

, IEEE

1284 parallel, Auto Switching, Coax or

Twinax interface for the printer. This menu also allows you to configure

several parameters for each interface.

•

NETWORK SETUP — This option allows you to select from Ethernet

Address options and Ethernet Parameters options.

•

ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL — This menu allows you to select the PGL or VGL

emulation from the menu if IGP is installed.

•

ACTIVE EMULATION — This menu allows you to activate the desired

emulation or combination of emulations to be used with your printer.

•

EMULATION — This menu allows you to configure the options which are

available for the current operating (active) emulation. For example, if

LinePrinter+ is the active emulation, then the LinePrinter+ emulation

options can be configured using this menu.

•

SURE SCAN — This menu is available only for OpenPrint firmware; it

allows the user to configure barcode optimization that will replace

graphical barcodes with PSA barcodes optimized for the P7000

technology.

•

PRINTER CONTROL — This menu allows you to select parameters

common to a general user, such as display language and Barcode

quality.

•

ADVANCED USER — This menu allows you to select several advanced

operating parameters for the printer, such as the speed at which paper

will advance when slewing.

•

DIAGNOSTICS — This menu includes the diagnostic tests, system

memory, software build part number, Feature File (if one exists),

the shuttle type, and statistics of the printer.

•

DATE – This menu allows you to set the printer’s real time clock. The

parameters include hours, minutes, year, month, and day.

•

PRINTER MGMT – These options allow you to select the PNE port type,

port number, port timeout period, status port number, and management

port number.

Chapter 4

Main Menu

P7000 STD Firmware

OFFLINE

CONFIG.

CONTROL

page 85

HOST

INTERFACE

page 87

Load Config.

Save Config.

Print Config.

Delete Config.

Power-Up Config.

Protect Configs.

Name Configs

Reset Cfg Names

Auto Save

Auto Switching*

Centronics

Dataproducts

IEEE 1284

Serial

Twinax

Coax

E-Net Adapter

Ethernet

If installed.

If Twinax is selected.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

NETWORK

SETUP

page 105

Adapter Address

Adapter Params

Ethernet Address

Ethernet Params

WLAN Address

WLAN Params

WLAN Kerberos

WLAN LEAP

WLAN EAP

QUICK

SETUP

page 77

HOST INTERFACE

Device ID

Adapter Address

Ethernet Address

WLAN Address

ZTP DataTime

ZTP WaitTime

ZTP TearDist

ACTIVE IGP EMUL

PGL SFCC

VGL SFCC

Printer Protocol

Form Length

Form Width

Select CPI

Select LPI

P-Series SFCC

Ribbon End Point

Save Config

Power Up Config

ZTP

SETTINGS

page 333

ZTP Function

ZTP TearDistance

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Platen Open

P7000 STD Firmware

EMULATION

page 123

CTHI

LinePrinter+

IGP/PGL

IGP/VGL

IPDS

PRINTER

CONTROL

page 251

Ribbon End Point

Open Platen @ BOF

Bar Code Quality

Tear Bar Dist.

View Function

Unidirectional

Display Language

Accented Chars.

PRINTER

MGMT

page 265

PNE Port

Mgmt Protocol

PNE Port Number

PNE Port Timeout

Status Port Numb

Mgmt Port Number

DATE

page 264

Hour

Minute

Year

Month

Day

DIAGNOSTICS

page 261

Printer Tests

Test Width

Paper Out Dots

System Memory

Print Statistics

Software Build

Feature File

Shuttle Type

ACTIVE

IGP EMUL

page 121

ADVANCED

USER

page 254

Ptx Setup Option

Hex Dump Mode

Power-up State

Downloaded Fonts

PMD Fault

Power Stacker

Auto Elevator

Auto Locking

File System

Set Sharing

Shuttle Timeout

Slow Paper Slew

Alarm

Power Saver Time

Pwr Save Control

Cancel Key

Ret. Status Port

Set Lock Key

RBN Low Warn@

RBN Low Action

RBN End Action

IGP/PGL*

IGP/VGL

If installed.

If Twinax is selected.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for pedestal printers only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

Chapter 4

Main Menu

P7000 TN Firmware

OFFLINE

CONFIG.

CONTROL

page 85

HOST

INTERFACE

page 87

Load Config.

Save Config.

Print Config.

Delete Config.

Power-Up Config.

Protect Configs.

Name Configs

Reset Cfg Names

Auto Save

Auto Switching*

Centronics

Dataproducts

IEEE 1284

Serial

E-Net Adapter

Ethernet

NETWORK

SETUP

page 105

Adapter Address

Adapter Params

Ethernet Address

Ethernet Params

WLAN Address

WLAN Params

WLAN Kerberos

WLAN LEAP

WLAN EAP

QUICK

SETUP

page 77

HOST INTERFACE

Adapter Address

Ethernet Address

WLAN Address

ZTP DataTime

ZTP WaitTime

ZTP TearDist

ACTIVE IGP EMUL

PGL SFCC

VGL SFCC

Printer Protocol

Form Length

Form Width

Select CPI

Select LPI

P-Series SFCC

Ribbon End Point

Save Config

Power Up Config

ZTP

SETTINGS

page 333

ZTP Function

ZTP TearDistance

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Platen Open

If installed.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

P7000 TN Firmware

EMULATION

page 123

LinePrinter+

IGP/PGL

IGP/VGL

PRINTER

CONTROL

page 251

Ribbon End Point

Open Platen @ BOF

Bar Code Quality

Tear Bar Dist.

View Function

Unidirectional

Display Language

Accented Chars.

PRINTER

MGMT

page 265

PNE Port

Mgmt Protocol

PNE Port Number

PNE Port Timeout

Status Port Numb

Mgmt Port Number

DATE

page 264

Hour

Minute

Year

Month

Day

DIAGNOSTICS

page 261

Printer Tests

Test Width

Paper Out Dots

System Memory

Print Statistics

Software Build

Feature File

Shuttle Type

ACTIVE

IGP EMUL

page 121

IGP/PGL*

IGP/VGL

ADVANCED

USER

page 254

Ptx Setup Option

Hex Dump Mode

Power-up State

Downloaded Fonts

PMD Fault

Power Stacker

Auto Elevator

Auto Locking

File System

Set Sharing

Shuttle Timeout

Slow Paper Slew

Alarm

Power Saver Time

Pwr Save Control

Cancel Key

Ret. Status Port

Set Lock Key

RBN Low Warn@

RBN Low Action

RBN End Action

If installed.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for pedestal printers only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

Chapter 4

Main Menu

P7000 PCL-II Firmware

OFFLINE

CONFIG.

CONTROL

page 85

HOST

INTERFACE

page 87

Load Config.

Save Config.

Print Config.

Delete Config.

Power-Up Config.

Protect Configs.

Name Configs

Reset Cfg Names

Auto Save

Auto Switching*

Centronics

Dataproducts

IEEE 1284

Serial

E-Net Adapter

Ethernet

NETWORK

SETUP

page 105

Adapter Address

Adapter Params

Ethernet Address

Ethernet Params

WLAN Address

WLAN Params

WLAN Kerberos

WLAN LEAP

WLAN EAP

QUICK

SETUP

page 77

HOST INTERFACE

Adapter Address

Ethernet Address

WLAN Address

ZTP DataTime

ZTP WaitTime

ZTP TearDist

ACTIVE EMULATION

PGL SFCC

VGL SFCC

Printer Protocol

Form Length

Form Width

Select CPI

Select LPI

P-Series SFCC

Page Length Rep.

Max Line Width

Ribbon End Point

Save Config

Power Up Config

ZTP

SETTINGS

page 333

ZTP Function

ZTP TearDistance

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Platen Open

If installed.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If PCL-II is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

P7000 PCL-II Firmware

EMULATION

page 123

LinePrinter+

IGP/PGL

IGP/VGL

PCL-II

PRINTER

CONTROL

page 251

Ribbon End Point

Open Platen @ BOF

Bar Code Quality

Tear Bar Dist.

View Function

Unidirectional

Display Language

PRINTER

MGMT

page 265

PNE Port

Mgmt Protocol

PNE Port Number

PNE Port Timeout

Status Port Numb

Mgmt Port Number

DATE

page 264

Hour

Minute

Year

Month

Day

DIAGNOSTICS

page 261

Printer Tests

Test Width

Paper Out Dots

System Memory

Print Statistics

Software Build

Feature File

Shuttle Type

ACTIVE

EMULATION

page 121

PCL-II

IGP/PGL & LP+

IGP/VGL & LP+

PCL-II

LinePrinter+

(if IGP is not installed)

ADVANCED

USER

page 254

Hex Dump Mode

Power-up State

PMD Fault

Power Stacker

Auto Elevator

Auto Locking

File System

Shuttle Timeout

Slow Paper Slew

Alarm

Power Saver Time

Pwr Save Control

Cancel Key

Ret. Status Port

Set Lock Key

RBN Low Warn@

RBN Low Action

RBN End Action

If installed.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If PCL-II is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for pedestal printers only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

Chapter 4

Main Menu

P7000 LG Firmware

OFFLINE

CONFIG.

CONTROL

page 85

HOST

INTERFACE

page 87

Load Config.

Save Config.

Print Config.

Delete Config.

Power-Up Config.

Protect Configs.

Name Configs

Reset Cfg Names

Auto Save

Auto Switching*

Centronics

Dataproducts

IEEE 1284

Serial

E-Net Adapter

Ethernet

NETWORK

SETUP

page 105

Adapter Address

Adapter Params

Ethernet Address

Ethernet Params

WLAN Address

WLAN Params

WLAN Kerberos

WLAN LEAP

WLAN EAP

QUICK

SETUP

page 77

HOST INTERFACE

Adapter Address

Ethernet Address

WLAN Address

ZTP DataTime

ZTP WaitTime

ZTP TearDist

ACTIVE EMULATION

PGL SFCC

VGL SFCC

Printer Protocol

Form Length

Form Width

Select CPI

Select LPI

P-Series SFCC

Vert Forms

Horiz Forms

Ribbon End Point

Save Config

Power Up Config

ZTP

SETTINGS

page 333

ZTP Function

ZTP TearDistance

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Platen Open

If installed.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LG is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

P7000 LG Firmware

EMULATION

page 123

LinePrinter+

IGP/PGL

IGP/VGL

PRINTER

CONTROL

page 251

Ribbon End Point

Open Platen @ BOF

Bar Code Quality

Tear Bar Dist.

View Function

Unidirectional

Display Language

PRINTER

MGMT

page 265

PNE Port

Mgmt Protocol

PNE Port Number

PNE Port Timeout

Status Port Numb

Mgmt Port Number

DATE

page 264

Hour

Minute

Year

Month

Day

DIAGNOSTICS

page 261

Printer Tests

Test Width

Paper Out Dots

System Memory

Print Statistics

Software Build

Feature File

Shuttle Type

ACTIVE

EMULATION

page 121

IGP/PGL & LP+

IGP/VGL & LP+

LinePrinter+

(if IGP is not installed)

ADVANCED

USER

page 254

Hex Dump Mode

Power-up State

PMD Fault

Power Stacker

Auto Elevator

Auto Locking

File System

Shuttle Timeout

Slow Paper Slew

Alarm

Power Saver Time

Pwr Save Control

Cancel Key

Ret. Status Port

Set Lock Key

RBN Low Warn@

RBN Low Action

RBN End Action

If installed.

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LG is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for pedestal printers only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

Chapter 4

Main Menu

P7000 ANSI Firmware

OFFLINE

CONFIG.

CONTROL

page 85

HOST

INTERFACE

page 87

Load Config.

Save Config.

Print Config.

Delete Config.

Power-Up Config.

Protect Configs.

Name Configs

Reset Cfg Names

Auto Save

Auto Switching*

Centronics

Dataproducts

IEEE 1284

Serial

E-Net Adapter

Ethernet

NETWORK

SETUP

page 105

Adapter Address

Adapter Params

Ethernet Address

Ethernet Params

WLAN Address

WLAN Params

WLAN Kerberos

WLAN LEAP

WLAN EAP

QUICK

SETUP

page 77

HOST INTERFACE

Adapter Address

Ethernet Address

WLAN Address

ZTP DataTime

ZTP WaitTime

ZTP TearDist

ACTIVE EMULATION

PGL SFCC

VGL SFCC

Printer Protocol

Form Length

Form Width

Select CPI

Select LPI

P-Series SFCC

Margins

Ribbon End Point

Save Config

Power Up Config

ZTP

SETTINGS

page 333

ZTP Function

ZTP TearDistance

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Platen Open

If installed

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If ANSI is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

P7000 ANSI Firmware

EMULATION

page 123

LinePrinter+

44/48XX-ANSI

IGP/PGL

IGP/VGL

PRINTER

CONTROL

page 251

Ribbon End Point

Open Platen @ BOF

Bar Code Quality

Tear Bar Dist.

View Function

Unidirectional

Display Language

Accented Chars.

PRINTER

MGMT

page 265

PNE Port

Mgmt Protocol

PNE Port Number

PNE Port Timeout

Status Port Numb

Mgmt Port Number

DATE

page 264

Hour

Minute

Year

Month

Day

DIAGNOSTICS

page 261

Printer Tests

Test Width

Paper Out Dots

System Memory

Print Statistics

Software Build

Feature File

Shuttle Type

ACTIVE

EMULATION

page 121

44/48XX-ANSI

IGP/PGL & LP+

IGP/VGL & LP+

44/48XX-ANSI

LinePrinter+

(if IGP is not installed)

ADVANCED

USER

page 254

Ptx Setup Option

Hex Dump Mode

Power-up State

Downloaded Fonts

PMD Fault

Power Stacker

Auto Elevator

Auto Locking

File System

Set Sharing

Shuttle Timeout

Slow Paper Slew

Alarm

Power Saver Time

Pwr Save Control

Cancel Key

Ret. Status Port

Set Lock Key

RBN Low Warn@

RBN Low Action

RBN End Action

If installed

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If ANSI is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for pedestal printers only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

Chapter 4

Main Menu

OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript/PDF Firmware

OFFLINE

CONFIG.

CONTROL

page 85

HOST

INTERFACE

page 87

Load Config.

Save Config.

Print Config.

Delete Config.

Power-Up Config.

Protect Configs.

Name Configs

Reset Cfg Names

Auto Save

Auto Switching*

Centronics

Dataproducts

IEEE 1284

Serial

E-Net Adapter

Ethernet

NETWORK

SETUP

page 105

Adapter Address

Adapter Params

Ethernet Address

Ethernet Params

WLAN Address

WLAN Params

WLAN Kerberos

WLAN LEAP

WLAN EAP

QUICK

SETUP

page 77

HOST INTERFACE

Adapter Address

Ethernet Address

WLAN Address

ZTP DataTime

ZTP WaitTime

ZTP TearDist

ACTIVE EMULATION

Resolution

Paper Size

PGL SFCC

VGL SFCC

Printer Protocol

Form Length

Form Width

Select CPI

Select LPI

P-Series SFCC

Ribbon End Point

Save Config

Power Up Config

ZTP

SETTINGS

page 333

ZTP Function

ZTP TearDistance

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Platen Open

If installed

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If Postscript/PDF is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for Zero Tear Pedestal printer only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

OpenPrint P7000 STD Postscript/PDF Firmware

EMULATION

page 123

LinePrinter+

IGP/PGL

IGP/VGL

Postscript/PDF

PRINTER

CONTROL

page 251

Ribbon End Point

Open Platen @ BOF

Bar Code Quality

Tear Bar Dist.

View Function

Unidirectional

Display Language

Accented Chars.

PRINTER

MGMT

page 265

PNE Port

Mgmt Protocol

PNE Port Number

PNE Port Timeout

Status Port Numb

Mgmt Port Number

DATE

page 264

Hour

Minute

Year

Month

Day

DIAGNOSTICS

page 261

Printer Tests

Test Width

Paper Out Dots

System Memory

Print Statistics

Software Build

Feature File

Shuttle Type

ACTIVE

EMULATION

page 121

Postscript/PDF

IGP/PGL & LP+

IGP/VGL & LP+

Postscript/PDF

LinePrinter+

(if IGP is not installed)

SURE SCAN

page 242

Optimize Barcode

Alignment

Hor. Quiet Zone

Ver. Erase Zone

Quiet Zone Fault

Update PDF

Barcodes On Page

Bcodes Optimized

If installed

If PGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If VGL is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If LP+ is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

If Postscript/PDF is selected from the ACTIVE EMULATION menu.

Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial.

If Real Time Clock (RTC) option is installed.

Available for pedestal printers only.

Based on WLAN radio installed.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

ADVANCED

USER

page 254

Ptx Setup Option

Hex Dump Mode

Power-up State

Downloaded Fonts

PMD Fault

Power Stacker

Auto Elevator

Auto Locking

File System

Set Sharing

Shuttle Timeout

Slow Paper Slew

Alarm

Power Saver Time

Pwr Save Control

Cancel Key

Rcv. Status Port

Ret. Status Port

Set Lock Key

RBN Low Warn@

RBN Low Action

RBN End Action

Chapter 4

Main Menu

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

OFFLINE

CONFIG.

CONTROL

page 85

Load Config.

Save Config.

Print Config.

Delete Config.

Power-Up Config.

Protect Configs.

Name Configs

Reset Cfg Names

If installed.

Available for pedestal printers only.

If a Feature File has been downloaded.

Not available if PNE Port is set at Serial.

QUICK

SETUP

page 77

HOST INTERFACE

ETHERNET ADDRESS

WLAN Address

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Tear Dist

Resolution

Paper Size

Ribbon End Point

Load Config.

Save Config.

Power-Up Config.

DIAGNOSTICS

page 261

Printer Tests

Test Width

Paper Out Dots

System Memory

Print Statistics

Software Build

Feature File

Shuttle Type

ADVANCED

USER

page 254

Ptx Setup Option

Hex Dump Mode

Power-Up State

PMD Fault

Auto Locking

File System

Set Sharing

Shuttle Timeout

Slow Paper Slew

Alarm

Power Saver Time

Pwr Save Control

Cancel Key

Rcv. Status Port

Ret. Status Port

Set Lock Key

RBN Low Warn@

RBN Low Action

RBN End Action

HOST

INTERFACE

page 87

IEEE 1284

Ethernet

Auto Switching*

Centronics

Dataproducts

Serial

NETWORK

SETUP

page 105

Ethernet Address

Ethernet Params

WLAN Address

WLAN Params

WLAN EAP

PRINTER

CONTROL

page 251

Ribbon end Point

Open Platen @ BOF

Tear Bar Dist.

Unidirectional

Display Language

ZTP

SETTINGS

page 333

ZTP Function

ZTP TearDistance

ZTP Data Time

ZTP Wait Time

ZTP Platen Open

SURE SCAN

page 242

Optimize Barcode

Alignment

Hor. Quiet Zone

Ver. Erase Zone

Quiet Zone Fault

Update PDF

Barcodes On Page

Bcodes Optimized

EMULATION

page 123

Postscript/PDF

PRINTER

MGMT

page 265

PNE Port

Mgmt Protocol

PNE Port Number

PNE Port Timeout

Status Port Numb

Mgmt Port Number

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

QUICK SETUP Menu

When the printer is in offline mode, QUICK SETUP is the first Main Menu

option that appears on the control panel. The QUICK SETUP menu offers

basic menu items required to configure your printer. This section describes

the options within the QUICK SETUP menu.

NOTE: The options in your menu will vary depending on the firmware, host

IO, emulations selected, and other features available with your

printer.

Host Interface

The Host Interface menu enables you to select and configure interfaces

between the printer and your host computer.

Device ID

This parameter defines the printer emulation as IPDS, 4234-2 or 5225. After

the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host. IPDS is

the default.

Adapter Address

•

IP Address. A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a

printer or server in a LAN or WAN.

•

Subnet Mask. A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller

subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP

packets need to be forwarded to other subnets.

•

Gateway Address. A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware

device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible

networks, which can include protocol translation.

•

MAC Address. This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number,

and is unique for each printer. It is read-only.

•

DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but

consult your administrator for the appropriate setting.

QUICK SETUP Menu

Chapter 4

QUICK SETUP Menu

Ethernet Address

•

IP Address. A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a

printer or server in a LAN or WAN.

•

Subnet Mask. A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller

subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP

packets need to be forwarded to other subnets.

•

Gateway Address. A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware

device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible

networks, which can include protocol translation.

•

MAC Address. This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number,

and is unique for each printer. It is read-only.

•

DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but

consult your administrator for the appropriate setting.

WLAN Address

•

IP Address. A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a

printer or server in a LAN or WAN.

•

Subnet Mask. A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller

subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP

packets need to be forwarded to other subnets.

•

Gateway Address. A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware

device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible

networks, which can include protocol translation.

•

MAC Address. This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number,

and is unique for each printer. It is read-only.

•

DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but

consult your administrator for the appropriate setting.

ZTP DataTime

This option sets the pause time in the data stream that the ZTP requires

before moving the form to the tear bar once a print job is completed. The

values range from .5 to 5 seconds. The default is .5 seconds.

ZTP WaitTime

This option sets the minimum amount of time that the form stays at the tear

bar. This allows you time to remove the form before the form is retracted to

print the next form. The adjustable values range from 500 to 5000

milliseconds in increments of 500 milliseconds. The default value is 2

seconds.

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

ZTP TearDist

This option sets the tear off distance from the current print position to the tear

bar. Adjustable values in increments of 1/144th of an inch range from 200 to

2880. The up and down arrows adjust the display value. When you press the

ENTER key, the selected value is stored and a scale is printed to indicate the

current tear off position. The default value is 1060.

NOTE: When a new value is selected, the printer will lose the current print

position. You must reset the top of form to automatically save the new

value.

Active Emulation

The Active Emulation menu enables you to select a combination of

emulations as described in Table 2 on page 61.

Active IGP Emulation

The Active IGP Emulation menu enables you to activate either the PGL or

VGL emulation. This menu is only available with the P7000 STD and TN

firmware as described in Table 2 on page 61.

PGL SFCC

You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function

Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an

IGP command.

•

7E (default)

•

1 – FF

VGL SFCC

You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function

Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an

IGP command.

•

5E (default)

•

1 – FF

Printer Protocol

Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus

Programmer's Reference Manual for more information.

Form Length

Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set

the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi

(lines per inch).

QUICK SETUP Menu

Chapter 4

QUICK SETUP Menu

Form Width

The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the

current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the

actual paper width.

Select CPI

This parameter allows you to specify the characters per inch (cpi) values.

The options are 10.0, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 17.1, and 20.0. The factory default is

10.0 CPI.

Select LPI

This parameter allows you to specify the lines per inch (lpi) values.

The options are 6.0, 8.0, and 10.3 LPI. The factory default is 6.0 LPI.

P-Series SFCC

This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.

P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:

•

SOH (hex 01) (default)

•

ESC (hex 1B)

•

ETX (hex 03)

•

CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E) – also called caret (^)

•

TILDE (hex 7E) – (~)

NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~)

are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data

stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will

occur.

Margins

•

Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge

of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.

•

Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right

edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.

•

Top Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the top of the page

and incrementing from the top down.

•

Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of

the page and incrementing from the bottom up.

Form Length

Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set

the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi

(lines per inch).

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

Form Width

The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the

current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the

actual paper width.

Vert Forms

•

Bot Frm 66/6 (default). This option sets the bottom margin for the forms.

You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging

from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right

arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER

to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to

0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.

•

Top Mrg 6/0 This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must

specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198

lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to

increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to

change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and

bottom margins do not cross each other.

Horiz Forms

•

Left Mgr 0.00 (default). This sets the left margin for the forms. You must

specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1 inches. The

default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to

decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will

automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each

other.

•

Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify

the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The

default value is 13.2. Press NEXT to increase the value, PREV to

decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will

automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each

other.

Page Length Rep

•

Inches/Page (default). Allows the user to set the page length in inches.

•

Lines/Page. Allows the user to set the page length in number of lines.

Max Line Width

Set the maximum line width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of the

printer.

QUICK SETUP Menu

Chapter 4

QUICK SETUP Menu

Resolution

This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used

when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print

resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.

The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P7000 STD:

•

120x144 DPI (default)

•

90 x 96 DPI

The following resolutions are available on Openprint P7000 HD:

•

180x180 DPI (default)

•

180x90 DPI

•

90x180 DPI

•

120x120 DPI

•

90x90 DPI

Paper Size

This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. Available options

include:

•

Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.

•

Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch

increments. The default is 13.6 inches.

•

Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three

length options are available:

Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1

inch increments.

1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6

to 144 lines.

1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8

to 192 lines.

To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of

the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper,

select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to

72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu

must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches”

menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not

exact.

The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing

that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration

printout will also show the length menu used.

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

•

See Table 3 for paper size options and actual sizes.

Ribbon End Point

This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon

as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a

darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting

is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%.

Load Config.

The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter

allows you to select and load a specific configuration.

Table 3. Paper Size Options and Actual Size

Paper Size Actual Size

US Fanfold 13.6 x 11 in

Letter 8.5 x 11 in

Legal 8.5 x 14 in

Executive 7.3 x 10.5 in

A3 11.7 x 16.5 in

A4 8.3 x 11 2/3 in

A5 5.8 x 8.3 in

A6 4.1 x 5.8 in

Fanfold 10x14in 10 x 14 in

Tabloid 11x17in 11 x 17 in

Fanfold 12x12in 12 x 12 in

JIS B5 7.2 x 10.1 in

US Folio 8.5 x 13 in

No. 10 Envelope 4.1 x 9.5 in

DL Envelope 4.3 x 8.7 in

C5 Envelope 6.4 x 9 in

C6 Envelope 4.5 x 6.4 in

ISO B5 6.9 x 9.8 in

QUICK SETUP Menu

Chapter 4

QUICK SETUP Menu

Save Config

This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print

job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings

for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost

if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new

configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been

deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See

“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 53 for details.

Power Up Config

This option allows you to specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or

1-8) will be the power-up configuration.

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

CONFIG. CONTROL Menu

The CONFIG. CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer’s

configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs.

Load Config.

The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter

allows you to select and load a specific configuration.

Save Config.

This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print

job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings

for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost

if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new

configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been

deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See

“Saving Your New Configuration” on page 53 for details.

Print Config.

This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations.

Store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral.

Load

Config.

Save

Config.

Delete

Config.

Power-Up

Config.

Protect

Configs.

Name

Configs

Factory*

1-8

2-8

Current Short*

Current Full

Factory

Power-Up

All

1-8

2-8

Factory*

1-8

Disable*

Enable

1-8

* = Factory Default

Reset Cfg

Names

2-8

All

Auto Save

Enable*

Disable

CONFIG.

CONTROL

(from page 64,

66, 68, 70, 72,

74, and 76)

CONFIG. CONTROL Menu

Chapter 4

CONFIG. CONTROL Menu

Delete Config.

You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory

default configuration cannot be deleted.

Power-Up Config.

You can specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or 1-8) will be the

power-up configuration.

Protect Configs.

You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an

existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When

disabled (default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing

configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the

existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”

displays.

Name Configs

You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a

configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load

Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config.

menus. The name can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.

When you move into the Name Configs. menu, the top line of the display

shows the current configuration name. The second line of the display is

initially the same as the top line. You can modify the second line of the display

without affecting the top line until the ENTER key is pressed, which sets the

modified name.

Press the UP or DOWN (U or V

)

keys to cycle through the values available

for that character at the cursor location. Press the NEXT (Z) key to move to

the next character to be modified. Press the PREV key (Y) to go back to a

character you have already modified. Continue until you have entered the

name you want to give to this configuration, then press ENTER to save. The

name you entered will now represent this configuration on the printer's front

panel. To exit this menu without saving, press any key other than the ENTER

key. The configuration name will revert to the last saved value.

Reset Cfg Names

You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the

configuration number.

OpenPrint P7000 HD Postscript/PDF Firmware

Auto Save

•

Enable (default). When a change has been made to a Config. menu, this

option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the change to a

Config #.

If you are currently in the Factory Config. menus and make a change,

pressing ENTER saves to Config 1 or the next available Config. and

becomes the Power-Up Config. If the Current Config is Config 1 and a

menu change is made, pressing ENTER will save the change to Config 1.

•

Disable. The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made.

HOST INTERFACE Menu

The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many

types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer. The currently

selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message

display. Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface

parameters which can be configured.

Twinax

Coax

IEEE 1284Auto

Switching*

Centronics Dataproducts

Serial Ethernet

(Available with

CT Option)

(Available with

CT Option)

(see page 90)

(see page 88) (see page 92) (see page 95)

(see page 97) (see page 104)

* = Factory Default

If installed.

E-Net

Adapter

(see page 103)

HOST

INTERFACE

(from page 64,

66, 68, 70, 72,

74, and 76)

HOST INTERFACE Menu

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

IMPORTANT

When switching between Twinax, Coax, or Auto Switching, the printer

will load the power-up configuration and the new interface parameters.

Any settings made and not saved before selecting these interfaces will

be lost.

Auto Switching Submenu

Auto Switching gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams

sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to

the serial, parallel, Ethernet, coax and twinax ports as if they were the only

interface connected.

For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial

port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto

Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received. The

user does not have to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.

Auto Switching

(from page 87)

Parallel

Hotport

Serial

Hotport

C/T

Hotport

Port Type

Centronics*

(see page 92 for options)

Dataproducts

(see page 95 for options)

IEEE 1284

(see page 90 for options)

Disable

E-Net Adapter

(see page 103 for options)

Trickle Time

1/4 sec*

1/2 sec

1 sec

2 sec

4 sec

8 sec

16 sec

Off

Timeout

10 sec.*

(10-60)

Report Status

Disable*

Enable

Switch Out On

Data Timeout*

Session Close

Port Type

RS 232*

RS 422

Disable

Trickle Time

1/4 sec*

1/2 sec

1 sec

2 sec

4 sec

8 sec

16 sec

Off

Timeout

10 sec.*

(10-60)

Report Status

Disable*

Enable

Port Type

Twinax*

Coax

Disable

Timeout

10 sec.*

(10-60)

Report Status

Disable*

Enable

* = Factory Default

If Installed

Default for HD

Ethernet

Hotport

Timeout

10 sec.*

(10-60)

Switch Out On

Data Timeout

Session Close

Auto Switching Submenu

Port Type

Select the types of parallel, serial and/or C/T interfaces which are connected

to the printer. For example, if your printer is attached to one host with a

Centronics connection and a second host with an RS-422 serial connection,

you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu, RS-422 under

the Serial Hotport menu, and Disable under the C/T Hotport menu.

Trickle Time

When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by

the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from

timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this

feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for

future use.

For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then

receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel

port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from

being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.

The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next

byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the

host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its

buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport.

Timeout

This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and

check the other selected port types for data to print. When the printer has not

received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to timeout in

order to service the other ports.

Report Status

•

Disable (default). When a fault occurs on the printer, only the active port

reports the fault to the host.

•

Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active

port.

Switch Out On

•

Data Timeout (default). Allows Autoswitching when no data has been

received for the selected Time Out period.

•

Session Close. Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is

closed. If the Ethernet option is not installed the Network Socket is always

reported as closed and this menu option is ignored.

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu

The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and

supports bidirectional communication. Configuration of this interface is

controlled from the host. Refer to

ΙΕΕΕ 1284 Παραλλελ Ιντερφαχε

ον παγε 272

for more details about the available modes (Compatibility,

Nibble, and Byte).

Prime Signal

•

Enable (default). The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the

host asserts the prime signal.

•

Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host

asserts the prime signal.

TOF Action

•

Reset (default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the

prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the

prime signal parameter is enabled.

•

Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is

asserted from the host.

Buffer Size in K

This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284

parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte

increments. The default is 16K.

NOTE: OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.

IEEE 1284

(from page 87)

Prime

Signal

TOF

Action

Buffer Size

in K

Enable*

Disable

Reset*

Do Nothing

16*

1-16

* = Factory Default

OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.

Auto

Trickle

Disable*

Enable

Trickle

Time

1/4 sec*

1/2 sec

1 sec

2 sec

4 sec

8 sec

16 sec

Off

Offline

Process

Disable*

Enable

IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu

Auto Trickle

Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the

parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the

printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the

rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty.

Trickle Time

When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by

the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from

timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this

feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for

future use.

For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then

receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel

port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from

being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.

The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next

byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the

host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its

buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport.

Offline Process

•

Disable (default). When set to disable, the printer does not process

parallel/network data while offline.

•

Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not

print) the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until the

printer's buffer is full.

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

Centronics (Parallel) Submenu

Data Bit 8

•

Enable (default). Allows access to the extended ASCII character set.

•

Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a

zero, regardless of its actual setting.

PI Ignored

The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.

•

Enable (default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters

or control codes.

•

Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU

commands when the PI signal is true.

Data Polarity

The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your

host computer.

•

Standard (default). Does not expect the host computer to invert the data.

•

Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host

computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice versa.

Centronics

(from page 87)

Prime

Signal

TOF Action Buffer Size

in K

Enable*

Disable

Reset*

Do Nothing

16*

(1-16)

* = Factory Default

OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.

Auto

Trickle

Disable*

Enable

Trickle

Time

1/4 sec*

1/2 sec

1 sec

2 sec

4 sec

8 sec

16 sec

Off

Data Bit 8

Enable*

Disable

PI Ignored

Enable*

Disable

Data

Polarity

Standard*

Inverted

Resp.

Polarity

Standard*

Inverted

Busy On

Strobe

Enable*

Disable

Latch

Data On

Leading*

Trailing

Centronics (Parallel) Submenu

Resp. Polarity

The Resp. Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of

your host computer.

•

Standard (default). Does not invert the response signal.

•

Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.

Busy On Strobe

•

Enable (default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is received.

•

Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.

Latch Data On

Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data

strobe signal. The default is leading.

Prime Signal

•

Enable (default). The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the

host asserts the prime signal.

•

Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host

asserts the prime signal.

TOF Action

•

Reset (default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the

prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the

prime signal parameter is enabled.

•

Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is

asserted from the host.

Buffer Size in K

Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port

buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.

The default is 16K.

NOTE: OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.

Auto Trickle

Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the

parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the

printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the

rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out.

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

Trickle Time

When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by

the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from

timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this

feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for

future use.

For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then

receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel

port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from

being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.

The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next

byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the

host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its

buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport.

Dataproducts Submenu

Data Bit 8

•

Enable (default). Allows access to the extended ASCII character set.

•

Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a

zero, regardless of its actual setting.

PI Ignored

The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.

•

Enable (default). Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as

DVFU commands when the PI signal is true.

•

Disable. Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control

codes.

Data Polarity

The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your

host computer.

•

Standard (default). Does not expect the host computer to invert the data.

•

Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host

computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and zeros become ones.

Dataproducts

(from page 87)

Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Data

Polarity

Resp.

Polarity

Latch Data

Prime Signal

TOF Action Buffer Size

in K

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

Standard*

Inverted

Standard*

Inverted

Middle*

Trailing

Leading

Disable*

Enable

Reset*

Do Nothing

16*

(1-16)

* = Factory Default

OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.

Auto

Trickle

Disable*

Enable

Trickle

Time

1/4 sec*

1/2 sec

1 sec

2 sec

4 sec

8 sec

16 sec

Off

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

Resp. Polarity

The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity

of your host computer.

•

Standard (default). Does not invert the response signal.

•

Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.

Latch Data On

Specifies whether the data is read on the leading, middle, or trailing edge of

the data strobe signal. The default is Middle.

Prime Signal

•

Disable (default). The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if

the host asserts the prime signal.

•

Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host

asserts the prime signal.

TOF Action

•

Reset (default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the

prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the

prime signal parameter is enabled.

•

Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is

asserted from the host.

Buffer Size in K

Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Dataproducts parallel port

buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.

The default is 16K.

NOTE: OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.

Auto Trickle

Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the

parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the

printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the

rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out.

Serial Submenu

Trickle Time

When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by

the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from

timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this

feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for

future use.

For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then

receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel

port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from

being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.

The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next

byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the

host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its

buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport.

Serial Submenu

Serial

(from page 87)

Interface

Type

Data

Protocol

Baud

Rate

Word

Length 8

Stop

Bits 1

Parity

Data Term

Ready

Request to

Send

Buffer Size

in K

Poll

Character

Poll

Response

RS 232*

RS 422

XON/XOFF*

ETX/ACK

ACK/NAK

Series1 1 Char

Series1 2 Char

ENQ/ACK

DTR

600 Baud

1200 Baud

2400 Baud

4800 Baud

9600 Baud*

19200 Baud

38400 Baud

57600 Baud

115200 Baud

None*

Odd

Even

Mark

Sense

True*

On-Line and BNF

Off-Line or BF

On-Line

False

On-Line and BNF*

Off-Line or BF

On-Line

False

True

16*

1-16

00 Hex*

(0-FF hex)

0 ms*

(1-30 ms)

* = Factory Default

OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.

One Char

Enquiry

Disable*

Enable

Framing

Errors

Disable

Enable*

Idle

Response

Disable*

Enable

Offline

Process

Disable

Enable*

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

Interface Type

This parameter allows you to select either the RS-232 or RS-422 serial port

interface. The default is RS-232.

Data Protocol

You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host

interface requirements.

•

XON / XOFF (default). The printer controls the flow of communication

from the host by turning the transmission on and off. In some situations,

such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too

fast, the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF

character. An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in

the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size. If the host

keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware will

continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received. When

cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON). The data does not

have any End of Text codes;

XON / XOFF is a non-block protocol.

•

ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of

communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the

block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX

signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has

received the entire block of data.

•

ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has

accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the device

did not receive the transmission.

•

SERIES1 1 CHAR. The printer controls the flow of communication from

the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters

sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75

percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer full response

character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an online or offline buffer

full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host.

Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline, the appropriate

response character is sent. If the idle response option is enabled, the

printer will send a response character every two seconds while the

number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer

size. If a poll character is received (configurable from the Poll Character

xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF), the printer will

send a response character n milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll

Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30). This n

milliseconds is called the poll delay. The poll character will be removed

from the input data stream and will not be processed. This may cause

problems with the transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit

image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character

and another poll character is received, the second poll character has no

effect and is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from

buffer full to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new

printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.

Serial Submenu

The response characters are described in Table 4.

•

SERIES1 2 CHAR. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the

Series1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host. The

response characters are described in Table 5.

•

ENQ/ACK. Enquiry/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of data by

sending an ENQ (Enquiry, decimal 5, Control-E) approximately every 80

characters. When the printer is ready for more data, it replies with an ACK

(Acknowledge, decimal 6, Control-F).

•

DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to

the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the printer will send

a high signal; if the buffer is full, the printer will send a low signal. DTR

tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the host sends data during

an unsafe condition, data will be lost.) DTR is not available when RS-422

is selected.

Table 4. Series1 1 Char Response Characters

Printer State Response

Online and Buffer Empty CR

Online and Buffer Full 3

Offline and Buffer Empty 0

Offline and Buffer Full 2

Table 5. Series1 2 Char Response Characters

Printer State Response

Online and Buffer Empty 1 CR

Online and Buffer Full 3 CR

Offline and Buffer Empty 0 CR

Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR

100

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

Baud Rate

Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed

at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.

The choices for the RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces are 600, 1200, 2400,

4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud. The default is 9600

Baud.

NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to

use RS-422 or select a lower baud rate to prevent data loss. You also

may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve

performance.

Word Length

Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set

to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host

computer.

Stop Bits 1

Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits

can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in

the host computer.

Parity

Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must

match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer.

Data Term Ready

This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the

Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the

printer is ready to receive data.

•

True (default). Continuously asserts the DTR signal.

•

On Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the

printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.

•

Off Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is

offline or the internal serial buffer is full.

•

On Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.

•

False. Never asserts the DTR signal.

Serial Submenu

101

Request To Send

This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the

Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or

not the printer is ready to receive data.

•

On Line and BNF (default). Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is

online and the internal serial buffer is not full.

•

Off Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the

internal serial buffer is full.

•

On Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.

•

False. Never asserts the RTS signal.

•

True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.

Buffer Size in K

This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port

buffer. You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.

The default is 16K.

NOTE: 1. If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may need to

increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance.

2. OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of

64K.

Poll Character

This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this

character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the

printer (see Series1 protocol). It may be configured from 0 through FF

hexadecimal.

Poll Response

This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the

printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the

response. It may be configured from 0 through 30.

Idle Response

This option is for the Series1 protocol.

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable. The printer will send a response character every two seconds

while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the

buffer size.

102

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

One Char Enquiry

The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from

the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also allows you to

turn on and off this feature.

The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is

set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series 1, One Char Enquiry is automatically

disabled.

Framing Errors

Possible errors that can occur when the printer’s serial interface settings do

not match those of the host computer.

•

Enable (default). If a framing error occurs, a fault message will display on

the control panel.

•

Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on the

control panel.

Offline Process

•

Disable (default). When set to disable, the printer does not process

parallel/network data while in offline mode.

•

Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process without

printing the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until the

printer’s buffer is full.

Table 6. One Char Enquiry Response Characters

Printer State Response (hex)

Online and Buffer Not Full 22

Online and Buffer Full 23

Offline and Buffer Not Full 20

Offline and Buffer Full 21

E-Net Adapter Submenu

103

E-Net Adapter Submenu

The E-Net Adapter interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather

than attach the host directly into the printer. The detailed configuration of this

option is given in the PrintNet User's Manual.

Buffer Size in K

This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet

buffer. You can specify between 1-16 Kbytes. The default is 16 Kbytes.

NOTE: OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.

E-Net Adapter

(from page 87)

Buffer Size

in K

16*

1-16

* = Factory Default

OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.

104

Chapter 4

HOST INTERFACE Menu

Ethernet Submenu

The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than

attach the host directly into the printer. The detailed configuration of this

option is given in the Network Interface Card User's Manual.

Buffer Size in K

This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet

buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.

The default is 16 Kbytes.

NOTE: OpenPrint HD products have a range of 1 to 256 and a default of 64K.

Ethernet

(from page 87)

Buffer Size

in K

16*

1-16

* = Factory Default

OpenPrint HD products have an extended range to 256.

ADAPTER ADDRESS

105

NETWORK SETUP Menu

ADAPTER ADDRESS

IP Address

A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in

a LAN or WAN.

Subnet Mask

A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or

subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be

forwarded to other subnets.

NETWORK

SETUP

(from page 64)

ADAPTER

ADDRESS

See page 105.

WLAN

ADDRESS

See page 112.

ETHERNET

PARAMS

See page 110.

ETHERNET

ADDRESS

See page 109.

ADAPTER

PARAMS

See page 106.

WLAN

PARAMS

See page 113.

WLAN

KERBEROS

See page 117.

WLAN

LEAP

See page 119.

Only if the Ethernet Adapter feature is installed.

Only if the Integrated Ethernet feature is installed.

Only if the Wireless Adapter feature is installed.

Only if a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed.

Only if a Cisco radio card is installed.

Only if a Symbol 5127 radio card is installed.

WLAN

EAP

3, 4, 6

See page 120.

ADAPTER

ADDRESS

(from page 105)

IP Address Subnet

Mask

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx hhhhhhhhhhhh

* = Factory Default

Gateway

Address

MAC

Address

DHCP

Disable*

Enable

106

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

Gateway Address

A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that

translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include

protocol translation.

MAC Address

This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for

each printer. It is read-only.

DHCP

You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your

administrator for the appropriate setting.

The options include:

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable.

ADAPTER PARAMS

You may enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this menu,

as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme to use in processing Novell

signals. See the Novell chapter in the Network Interface Card User's Manual

for more details.

ADAPTER

PARAMS

(from page 105)

* = Factory Default

Novell

Frame

IPDS

Data Port

Ethernet

Speed

Ethernet 802.2*

802.2 Snap

Auto Sensing

Ethernet II

Ethernet 802.3

5001*

1023-65535

Auto Select*

10 Half Duplex

10 Full Duplex

100 Half Duplex

100 Full Duplex

Keep Alive

Timer

3 Minutes*

2 - 10 Minutes

Job Control

Standard*

Enhanced

Off

ASCII

Data Port

9100*

1023 - 65535

Novell

Protocol

Enable*

Disable

Nest Serv

Type

Auto*

Bindery

NDS

NetBIOS

Protocol

Enable*

Disable

ADAPTER PARAMS

107

Novell Protocol

This option determines whether the Novell protocol will be available. The

selections are as indicated below:

•

Enable (default). Makes the Novell protocol available with the ethernet

installed.

•

Disable. Makes the Novell protocol unavailable during printer operation.

Nest Serv Type

You can change the Nest Server using this option, but consult your

administrator for the appropriate setting.

The options are Auto (default), Bindery, and NDS.

NetBIOS Protocol

This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available. The

selections are as indicated below:

•

Enable (default). Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet

installed.

•

Disable. Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer

operation.

Novell Frame

This selection determines which framing scheme will be used in processing

Novell signals.

•

Ethernet 802.2 (default)

•

802.2 Snap

•

Auto Sensing

•

Ethernet II

•

Ethernet 802.3

ASCII Data Port

This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number

needs to match your host system setting.

•

9100 (default)

•

1023 - 65535

IPDS Data Port

This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the

IPDS option is installed.

The range is 0 - 5000, and the default is 5001.

108

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

Keep Alive Timer

This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer

on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has

terminated.

•

3 Minutes (default)

•

2 - 10 Minutes

Ethernet Speed

This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card

(NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different

systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select.

•

Auto Select. (default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform

an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex, 10

Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.

•

10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10

Megabits per second using half duplex.

•

10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10

Megabits per second using full duplex.

•

100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100

Megabits per second using half duplex.

•

100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100

Megabits per second using full duplex.

Job Control

The job control mode has three options:

•

Standard (default). The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the

current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done”

when the job is completely received by the NIC.

•

Enhanced. The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job

before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is

fully printed.

•

Off. No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer.

ETHERNET ADDRESS

109

ETHERNET ADDRESS

IP Address

A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in

a LAN or WAN.

Subnet Mask

A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or

subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be

forwarded to other subnets.

Gateway Address

A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that

translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include

protocol translation.

MAC Address

This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for

each printer. It is read-only.

DHCP

You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your

administrator for the appropriate setting.

The options include:

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable.

ETHERNET

ADDRESS

(from page 105)

IP Address Subnet

Mask

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx hhhhhhhhhhhh

* = Factory Default

Gateway

Address

MAC

Address

DHCP

Disable*

Enable

110

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

ETHERNET PARAMS

The ETHERNET PARAMS menu helps your printer communicate on a

network.

For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet

Mask, and MAC Address, refer to the Network Interface Card User's Manual.

NetBIOS Protocol

This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available. The

selections are as indicated below:

•

Enable (default). Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet

installed.

•

Disable. Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer

operation.

ASCII Data Port

This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number

needs to match your host system setting.

•

9100 (default)

•

1023 - 65535

IPDS Data Port

This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the

IPDS option is installed.

The range is 1023 - 65535, and the default is 5001.

Keep Alive Timer

This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer

on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has

terminated.

•

3 Minutes (default)

•

2 - 10 Minutes

ETHERNET

PARAMS

(from page 105)

* = Factory Default

If installed

Available for OpenPrint product only.

ASCII

Data Port

Ethernet

Speed

9100*

1023 - 65535

Auto Select*

10 Half Duplex

10 Full Duplex

100 Half Duplex

100 Full Duplex

Keep Alive

Timer

3 Minutes*

2 - 10 Minutes

NetBIOS

Protocol

Enable*

Disable

Job Control

Standard*

Enhanced

Fast Standard

Off

IPDS Data

Port

5001*

1023 - 65535

ETHERNET PARAMS

111

Ethernet Speed

This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card

(NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different

systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select.

•

Auto Select. (default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform

an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex, 10

Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.

•

10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10

Megabits per second using half duplex.

•

10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10

Megabits per second using full duplex.

•

100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100

Megabits per second using half duplex.

•

100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100

Megabits per second using full duplex.

Job Control

The job control mode has four options:

•

Standard (default). The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the

current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done”

when the job is completely received by the NIC.

•

Enhanced. The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job

before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is

fully printed.

•

Off. No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer.

•

Fast Standard. The EOJ (End of Job) packet is acknowledged

immediately. Use this selection if the job is timed out due to a delay in the

acknowledgement of the EOJ packet because of the amount of data

being printed.

NOTE: It is recommended to set this option to Enhanced if the emulation is

Postscript.

112

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

WLAN ADDRESS

IP Address

A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in

a LAN or WAN.

Subnet Mask

A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or

subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be

forwarded to other subnets.

Gateway Address

A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that

translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include

protocol translation.

MAC Address

This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for

each printer. It is read-only.

DHCP

You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your

administrator for the appropriate setting.

The options include:

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable.

WLAN

ADDRESS

(from page 105)

IP Address Subnet

Mask

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx hhhhhhhhhhhh

* = Factory Default

Gateway

Address

MAC

Address

DHCP

Disable*

Enable

WLAN PARAMS

113

WLAN PARAMS

WLAN

PARAMS

(from page 105)

Signal

Strength

SSID

Name

SSID Name (01 - 15)

SSID Name (16 - 30)

SSID Name (31 - 32)

Preamble

Default*

Short

Long

Operation

Mode

Infrastructure*

Pseudo IBSS

Ad Hoc

Ant. Diversity

Diverse*

Primary

Auxiliary

* = Factory Default

Only when 40 Bites is selected

Only when 128 Bits is selected

Only when a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed.

Only when a Cisco radio card is installed.

Read only

Not displayed if LA5127 radio card is installed.

Only if LA5127 radio card is installed.

Min xfer

Rate

Auto-negotiate*

1Mb/Sec

2Mb/Sec

5.5Mb/Sec

11Mb/Sec

Power

Mgmt

0 ms.*

100 ms.

200 ms.

300 ms.

400 ms.

500 ms.

600 ms.

700 ms.

800 ms.

900 ms.

1000 ms.

Channel

Default*

1 - 15

Reset SSID

Name

Transmit

Power

100%*

0 - 100 %

Antenna

Primary*

Auxiliary

Diverse

Internat.

Mode

Disable*

Enable

Auth

Method

Open*

Shared

Kerberos

LEAP

WEP Key 1

Key Format

Hexadecimal*

ASCII

Key Width

128 Bits*

40 Bits

Byte 1: - Bytes 5

Byte 1: - Bytes 13

WEP Key 2

Key Format

Hexadecimal*

ASCII

Key Width

128 Bits*

40 Bits

Byte 1: - Bytes 5

Byte 1: - Bytes 13

WEP Key 3

Key Format

Hexadecimal*

ASCII

Key Width

128 Bits*

40 Bits

Byte 1: - Bytes 5

Byte 1: - Bytes 13

WEP Key 4

Key Format

Hexadecimal*

ASCII

Key Width

128 Bits*

40 Bits

Byte 1: - Bytes 5

Byte 1: - Bytes 13

Reset WEP

Keys

Default WEP

Keys

WPA

Mode

Disable*

Enable

WPA

Cipher

TKIP*

AES

TKIP+AES

Disable

WPA

P-Phs (01-15)

XXX

WPA P-Phs

(16-30)

WPA P-Phs

(31-32)

Reset WPA

P-Phs

114

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

Signal Strength

This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal.

NOTE: This is a display value only and cannot be changed.

Operation Mode

Allows you to select the way the Wireless option communicates:

•

Infrastructure (default). The Wireless option must go through a server.

•

Pseudo IBSS. Proprietary, peer-to-peer communication (without a

server). The two peers must be specific to one manufacturer.

•

Ad Hoc. Standard, peer-to-peer communication (without a server).

The two peers can be from different manufacturers.

SSID Name

A 1 - 32 character, case sensitive string that identifies the group the printer

talks to.

NOTE: The SSID name may be edited in three parts (1-15), (16-30), and

(31-32).

For each part of the SSID name, press the MICRO UP or MICRO DOWN

keys to cycle through the values available for that character at the cursor

location. Press the SCROLL UP key to move to the next character to be

modified. Press the SCROLL DOWN key to go back to the name you want to

give to this SSID name, then press ENTER to save. The name you entered

will now represent this SSID name on the printer’s front panel. To exit this

menu without saving, press any key other than the ENTER key. The SSID

name will revert to the last saved value.

Reset SSID Name

Allows you to reset the SSID name.

Min Xfer Rate

Allows you to set the minimum speed at which the Wireless Option will accept

a connection (in million bits per second). The options are:

•

Auto-negotiate (default)

•

1Mb/Sec.

•

2Mb/Sec.

•

5.5Mb/Sec

•

11Mb/Sec

Channel

Allows you to select the RF channel. The options are Default (the factory

default) and 1-15.

WLAN PARAMS

115

Ant. Diversity

The type of antenna used:

•

Diverse (default). Select when you want to use the antenna with the best

reception.

•

Primary. Select when you want to use the Primary antenna on the server.

•

Auxiliary. Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the

server.

Preamble

The length of the preamble in transmit packets.

•

Default (default). The Wireless option automatically determines the

length.

•

Short. For newer printers which can handle higher transer rate speeds.

•

Long. For older printers which cannot handle higher transfer rate speeds.

Antenna

•

Primary (default). Select when you want to use the Primary antenna on

the RF card.

•

Auxiliary. Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the RF

card.

•

Diverse. Select when you want to use the antenna with the best

reception.

Power Mgmt

This allows you to set power-save mode and sleep time. A value specifying

the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided. If set to zero, power-save

mode will be disabled. The range includes:

•

0 ms. (default)

•

100 ms. - 1000 ms.

Transmit Power

The power level as a percentage of full power (0 - 100%).

Internat. Mode

When enabled, the Wireless option adapts to international frequency

requirements in Europe. The options include:

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable

116

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

Auth Method

This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the

wireless network interface.

•

Open (default). Selects open authentication.

•

Shared. Selects shared key authentication.

•

Kerberos. Selects Kerberos authentication (for use when a Symbol RF

card is installed).

•

LEAP. Selects LEAP authentication (for use with a Cisco RF card

installed).

WEP Key 1 Through WEP Key 4

•

WEP Key Format. Allows you to format the WEP keys in ASCII or

hexadecimal code. The default is hexadecimal.

•

WEP Key Width. This is the encryption strength. The options are 40 Bits

and 128 Bits; 40 Bits are weaker and 128 Bits are stronger.

NOTE: If you select 40 Bits, the WEP key BYTE6 through WEP Key BYTE13

menus will not display.

The default is 128 Bits.

•

WEP Key BYTE1 through BYTE13. These are the individual characters

of the encryption key.

Default WEP Key

This feature enables you to encrypt (scramble) information for security

purposes. With this feature, you can set up to four encryption keys, in either

ASCII or hexadecimal format, and in either 40 or 128 bits. (The more bits you

choose, the more difficult it will be to decode the information.)

NOTE: None of the WEP Key Configuration menus display on the

configuration printout.

Reset WEP Keys

Allows you to reset all four WEP keys (WEP Key 1 through WEP Key 4) at

one time.

WPA Mode

Selects the WPA wireless security mode.

•

Disable (default). WPA security is disabled.

•

Personal. Selects personal or pre-shared key mode for WPA security.

WLAN KERBEROS

117

WPA Cipher

Selects the WPA wireless security cipher setting. Options include:

•

TKIP (default)

•

AES

•

TKIP+AES

•

Disable

WPA P-Phs

Allows you to set the individual bytes of the WPA passphrase.

Reset WPA P-Phs

Allows you to reset all 32 bytes of the WPA passphrase at once.

WLAN KERBEROS

Kerberos Enable

•

Disable (default). Disables Kerberos authentication in the wireless

network interface.

•

Enable. Enables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network

interface.

WLAN

Kerberos

(from page 105)

Kerb.

Passwd

Kerb Pwd(01-15)

Kerb Pwd (16-30)

Kerb Pwd (31-40)

Reset

Kerb. Pwd

Ticket

Lifetime

Tckt Lifetime Units

Seconds*

Minutes

Hours

Days

Tckt Lifetime (SEC)

43200*

* = Factory Default

Only if a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed.

KDC Port

Number

88*

0-65535

Clock

Skew

Clock Skew Units

Seconds*

Minutes

Clock Skew (Sec)

300*

Renew

Lifetime

Renew Life Units

Seconds*

Minutes

Hours

Days

Renew Life (SEC)

Kerberos

Enable

Disable*

Enable

118

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

Kerb. Passwd

•

Kerb. Pwd (01-15). The first 15 characters of the Kerberos password

(maximum number of characters is 40).

•

Kerb. Pwd (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the Kerberos password

(maximum number of characters is 40).

•

Kerb. Pwd (31-40). Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password

(maximum number of characters is 40).

Reset Kerb. Pwd

Resets the Kerberos password to an empty string.

KDC Port Number

KDC (Key Distribution Center) port number is the 2-byte UDP/TCP port used

for Kerberos Communication.

The range is 0-65535, and the default is 88.

Clock Skew

Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds or minutes that

Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos

message is valid. The range for Seconds is 60-900, and the default is 300.

The range for Minutes is 1-15, and the default is 5.

Ticket Lifetime

Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds, Minutes, Hours, or

Days that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid before getting a

new one.

•

Seconds. The range is 300-259200, and the default is 43200.

•

Minutes. The range is 5-4320, and the default is 720.

•

Hours. The range is 1-72, and the default is 12.

•

Days. The range is 1-3, and the default is 1.

•

Tckt Lifetime (SEC). The ticket lifetime unit in seconds. The default is

43200.

Renew Lifetime

Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds, Minutes, Hours, or

Days before warning that a new Kerberos password is needed.

•

Seconds. The range is 0-604800, and the default is 0.

•

Minutes. The range is 0-10080, and the default is 0.

•

Hours. The range is 1-168, and the default is 0.

•

Days. The range is 0-7, and the default is 0.

•

Renew Life (SEC). Renew lifetime unit in seconds. The default is 0.

WLAN LEAP

119

WLAN LEAP

Auth Method

This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the

wireless network interface.

•

Open (default). Selects open authentication.

•

Shared. Selects shared key authentication.

•

LEAP. Selects LEAP authentication (for use with a Cisco RF card

installed).

LEAP Username

•

LEAP Username (01-15). The first 15 characters of the LEAP user name

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

LEAP Username (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP user name

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

LEAP User (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP user name

(maximum number of characters is 32).

Reset LEAP User

Resets the LEAP user name to an empty string.

LEAP Password

•

LEAP Password (01-15). The first 15 characters of the LEAP password

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

LEAP Password (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP password

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

LEAP Password (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP password

(maximum number of characters is 32).

Reset LEAP Password

Resets the LEAP password to an empty string.

WLAN

LEAP

(from page 105)

Auth Method

Open*

Shared

LEAP

* = Factory Default

Only if a Cisco radio card is installed.

LEAP

Username

Reset LEAP

User

LEAP Username (01-15)

LEAP Username (16-30)

LEAP Username (31-32)

LEAP

Password

LEAP Password (01-15)

LEAP Password (16-30)

LEAP Password (31-32)

Reset LEAP

Password

120

Chapter 4

NETWORK SETUP Menu

WLAN EAP

EAP Mode

This feature allows the user to select the mode used for the wireless network

interface.

•

None (default). EAP authentication is disabled.

•

LEAP. Selects Cisco LEAP authentication.

•

PEAP. Selects PEAP authentication.

•

TTLS. Selects TTLS authentication.

EAP Username

•

EAP Username (01-15). The first 15 characters of the EAP user name

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

EAP Username (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP user name

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

EAP User (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP user name (maximum

number of characters is 32).

Reset EAP User

Resets the EAP user name to an empty string.

EAP Password

•

EAP Password (01-15). The first 15 characters of the EAP password

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

EAP Password (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP password

(maximum number of characters is 32).

•

EAP Password (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP password

(maximum number of characters is 32).

Reset EAP Password

Resets the EAP password to an empty string.

WLAN

EAP

(from page 105)

EAP Mode

None*

LEAP

PEAP

TTLS

* = Factory Default

Only if a Symbol 5127 radio card is installed.

EAP

Username

Reset EAP

User

EAP Username (01-15)

EAP Username (16-30)

EAP Username (31-32)

EAP

Password

LEAP Password (01-15)

LEAP Password (16-30)

LEAP Password (31-32)

Reset EAP

Pswd

WLAN EAP

121

ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus

The emulation types present in the printer are based on the firmware installed

and the emulation options included. Both are configured from the Factory and

does not require any action from the user.

IMPORTANT

Be sure to know which type of firmware and options are purchased

(see Table 2) to understand the ACTIVE IGP EMUL, ACTIVE

EMULATION, and EMULATION main menus.

This ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATION function allows you to

activate the desired emulation. There are two methods for selecting the

desired emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the

printer menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the

emulation automatically (see the appropriate Programmer's Reference

Manual for details).

When changing from one emulation to the other, the printer will load the

power-up configuration and the new emulation parameters. Any configuration

settings performed before selecting these emulations that are not saved in

NVRAM will be lost.

Table 7. Available Firmware Types and Options

Firmware Type ACTIVE IGP

EMUL

ACTIVE

EMULATION

P7000 STD

IGP/PGL* N/A

IPDS

CTHI

IPG/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL N/A

IPDS

CTHI

IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

P7000 TN

IGP/PGL* N/A IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL N/A IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

NOTE:

* = Default Selection

The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.

The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &

LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.

The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or

ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.

ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus

122

Chapter 4

ACTIVE IGP EMUL and ACTIVE EMULATIONS Menus

P7000 PCL-II N/A

PCL-II* PCL-II

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

P7000 LG N/A

LG* LG

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

P7000 ANSI N/A

44/48XX-ANSI* 44/48XX-ANSI

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

OpenPrint P7000 STD N/A

Postscript/PDF* Postscript/PDF

IGP/PGL & LP+ IGP/PGL

LinePrinter+

IGP/VGL & LP+ IGP/VGL

LinePrinter+

OpenPrint P7000 HD NA N/A Postscript/PDF

NOTE:

* = Default Selection

The Active IGP EMULATION menu is only available when the PGL/VGL option is installed.

The ACTIVE EMULATION menu shows the options “IGP/PGL & LP+” and “IGP/VGL &

LP+” when the PGL/VGL option is installed. Otherwise, “LinePrinter+” replaces the options.

The selections under the EMULATION menu is based on the ACTIVE IGP EMULATION or

ACTIVE EMULATION settings with all Optional Emulations installed.

Table 7. Available Firmware Types and Options

Firmware Type ACTIVE IGP

EMUL

ACTIVE

EMULATION

WLAN EAP

123

EMULATION Menu

The EMULATION menu allows you to configure the emulation used with your

printer. The Proprinter XL, Epson FX, P-Series, P-Series XQ, and Serial

Matrix emulations are all part of LinePrinter +. You can configure options for

the active emulation via the EMULATION menu. Emulation options are further

described in their corresponding Programmer's Reference Manual.

CTHI

LinePrinter+ 44/48XX-

ANSI

IGP/PGL

IGP/VGL

IPDS

page 124 page 157 page 188 page 195 page 209 page 225

* = Factory Default

Optional Emulation

OpenPrint firmware only.

PCL-II

page 229

page 233

Postscript/

PDF

page 238

EMULATION

(from page 65,

67, 69, 71, 73,

75, and 76)

EMULATION Menu

124

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Standard

With a standard coax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM coax

printer models:

•

3287 Models 1 and 2

•

4234 Model 1

With a standard twinax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM

twinax printer models:

•

4234 Models 2 and 12

•

5225 Models 1, 2, 3, and 4

NOTE: The standard Coax/Twinax emulation selection will only be available

if Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu.

See page 87.

For more information, refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference

Manual.

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Standard* Simp Prot

Conv

Coax

Params

Twinax

Params

SPC Coax

Params

SPC Twinax

Params

page 126 page 135 page 152 page 155

* = Factory Default

Coax/Twinax Host Interface.

Available for TN emulation only.

CTHI

3270

Params

page 141

5250

Params

page 148

Simple Prot Conv

125

Simple Prot Conv

The Simple Protocol Converter (SPC) option allows those who use third party

add-on Coax or Twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a

Line Matrix printer with the Coax/Twinax (CTHI) capability as done using a

non-CT printer with the third party converter interfaces.

The SPC replaces the third party add-on protocol converters attached to older

line matrix printers.

The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC, or

network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces, and to three different

IBM host systems: System 3x, AS/400

and 3270 Mainframes.

The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax: MODE 219,

MODE IBM, and MODE PROLINE.

The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax

3287. The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your line

matrix printer: Centronics, Dataproducts, Serial, Coax, and Twinax. Also

supported are Epson, Proprinter, P-Series, Serial Matrix, IGP/VGL, and IGP/

PGL emulations.

The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through

Coax/Twinax and Parallel and Serial interfaces. This is accomplished through

the Auto Switching feature (see page 88). Because of hardware restrictions,

Coax and Twinax cannot be selected together.

For more information, consult the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference

Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option.

126

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Coax Emulation

CTHI

(from page 124)

Char Set

Select

Translation

Tbl

Active Char

Set

Prt Partial

Line

PA1 PA2

Buffer

Reprint

Early Print

Cmpl

SCS Buffer

Cntrl

Cancel

IGP/DCU

PTX

Transparent

(see page 127) Secondary Set*

Primary Set

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

Enable

Don’t Wait*

Wait Until Done

Enable*

Disable

Lead-in Chars

Set 1 <%>*

Set 2 ¬¬$

Set 3 _%_

User Defined

Usr Defined HTRN

Start Code 1

5F* (40-FF)

Start Code 2

5F* (40-FF)

Stop Code

5B* (40-FF)

Alt. Set 80-9F

Printable*

Control Code

* = Factory Default

Valid only when the printer

emulates 3287.

Set Text

Orientn

Image Buf

Size

Intervention

Req

Compatibility

Translate

Table

Host

Override

Format

Control

Max. Print

Width

Control By Host*

Left to Right

Right to Left

4K*

Send To Host*

Do Not Send

(see page 128) Default*

Downloaded

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

13.2 inches*

Printer Width

Standard*

Coax

Params

Buffer Print

Disable*

Enable

Change

Case

Dual Case*

Mono Case

Coax Emulation

127

Char Set Select

(from page 126)

Primary

Sets

Secondary

Sets

0037 English US*

0037 Eng Nether

0285 English UK

0273 Austr/Germ

0274 Belg. Old

0275 Brazilian

0260 Canad Fren

0277 Danish

0287 Danish Alt

0278 Finnish

0288 Finn. Alt

0297 French

0500 Internat 5

0280 Italian

0281 Japan. Eng

0282 Portuguese

0284 Span Speak

0289 Span. Alt

0500 Swiss Bil

0500 Belg. New

0803 Hebrew Old

0424 Hebrew

0892 OCR A

0893 OCR B

0420 Arabic

0880 Cyril. Old

0423 Greek Old

0875 Gr New Euro

0871 Icelandic

0290 Japan Kata

0870 Latin 2

0838 Thai

1026 Turkish

0890 Yugos. Old

1097 Farsi

1025 Cyrillic

0905 Turk. Old

0256 Intern. 1

0924 Euro Lat-9

1140 Euro Eng.

1141 Euro Aust.

1142 Euro Dan.

1143 Euro Finn.

1144 Euro Ital.

1145 Euro Span.

1146 Euro UK

1147 Euro Fren.

1148 Euro Swiss

1149 Euro Ice.

English US*

English UK

Austrian/German

German (Alt)

Belgian

Brazilian

Canadian French

Danish/Norweg.

Danish (Alt)

Finnish/Swedish

Finnish (Alt)

French

International

Italian

Japanese Eng.

Japanese Katak.

Portuguese

Portug. (Alt)

Spanish

Spanish (Alt)

Spanish Speak.

Swiss Fren/Ger

Old Hebrew

Hebrew

Farsi/Latin

Greek Old

Greek New

Arabic

Turkish

Turkish Old

Latin 2/ROECE

Yugoslavian

* = Factory Default

128

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Char Set Select

Specifies the print language used by the printer. Character sets are shown in

detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

Translation Tbl

Prints out SCS and DSC/DSE tables of the Coax interface's current character

set. This operation is valid only when the Coax interface is selected as the

current interface (see

ΗΟΣΤ ΙΝΤΕΡΦΑΧΕ Μενυ ον παγε 87

Active Char Set

Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active.

Secondary Set is the default.

Prt Partial Line

•

Enable (default). Forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer

(i.e., line not ending with a LF).

•

Disable. The last partial line of data will not be printed.

PA1

PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax Systems

Network Architecture Character String (SCS) data stream is active. This

function displays the “PA1 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is

pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is

put back in Online mode. Refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference

Manual for more information about SCS.

NOTE: Selecting the PA1 menu item again (“PA1 DISABLED” appears on the

operator panel) or selecting the PA2 menu item will reset the pending

PA1 function.

Compatibility

(from page 126)

CR At

MPP+1

NL At

MPP+1

Position Aft FF

(4234 only)

Last Char = FF Null

Suppression

FF Validity

Auto Skip

At End

FF After Job CR, EM & NL

(3287 only)

On*

Off

On*

Off

Off*

On*

Off

Off*

On*

Off

* = Factory Default

Coax Emulation

129

PA2

PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the Offline state and the coax SCS data

stream is active. This function displays the “PA2 ENABLED” message when

the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host

when the printer is put back in online mode.

NOTE: Selecting the PA2 menu item again (“PA2 DISABLED” appears on the

operator panel) or selecting the PA1 menu item will reset the pending

PA2 function.

Buffer Reprint

This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode. When the

ENTER key is pressed, “Buffer Reprint Enabled” is displayed and an

Intervention Required status is sent to the host. Pressing ENTER again

cancels the Buffer Reprint function and displays “Buffer Reprint Disabled.”

Early Print Cmpl

Allows the printer to send print (order) complete status to the host before the

printer is actually done printing all data. This option is valid only when the

printer is in DSC/DSE mode.

•

Disable (default). The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete

response until all printing is complete.

•

Enable. The printer will send an acknowledgment to the host when it is

able to accept more data.

NOTE: When Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, you may

lose data.

SCS Buffer Cntrl

This option is used in Coax LU1/SCS mode only.

•

Don’t Wait (default). The printer does not wait for the job to be printed

before sending the print completion to the host.

•

Wait Until Done. The printer waits for the job to print before sending the

print completion to the host.

This option speeds up the LU1 job printing for short jobs. If you select “Don’t

Wait,” there is a risk that you may not be able to recover the print job when the

printer has fault.

Cancel IGP/DCU

•

Enable (default). Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the

host or when the CANCEL key is pressed.

•

Disable. Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is

put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed.

130

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

PTX Transparent

Lead-in Chars

You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through

standard Coax emulations. To access these features, send text commands in

the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets

are available:

•

Set 1. start code: <%

stop code: >

•

Set 2. start code:

¬¬

stop code: $

•

Set 3. start code: _%

stop code: _

•

User Defined.

Usr Defined HTRN

This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character.

This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the

Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for

the User Defined option:

•

Start Code 1 5F

•

Start Code 2 5F

•

Stop Code 5B

Alt. Set 80-9F

•

Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

•

Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a

control code.

Change Case

Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in non-

SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed

online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of

the following “right to left” sets: Katak., Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi. The

default is Dual Case.

SCS (System Network Architecture Character String) mode is controlled by

the host computer.

Coax Emulation

131

Set Text Orientn

Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This

allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of

left to right.

•

Control By Host (default). Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use

the “Set Text Orientation” command from the host.

•

Left to Right.

•

Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be

notified of print direction changes when the printer is placed online.

Image Buf Size

Allows you to select 2K or 4K as the image buffer size. This option is valid

only when the printer emulates the 3287. For the 4234 emulation, the buffer

size is fixed at 4K. A POR status is sent to the host when the printer is placed

online.

Intervention Req

•

Send to Host (default). The printer sends a signal to the host computer

when a printer fault or hold mode time-out occurs.

•

Do Not Send. No signal will be sent to the host computer.

Compatibility Op

The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the

non-SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated.

CR At MPP+1

MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This

option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1.

•

On (default). Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the

next line.

•

Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line.

NL At MPP+1

Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.

•

On (default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from the

current position.

•

Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.

132

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Position Aft FF (4234 only)

Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed

command is sent.

•

On (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line

on the next form.

•

Off. Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the

next form.

Last Char = FF

Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code

encountered in the print buffer.

•

On (default). Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next

form.

•

Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form.

NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on.

If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer,

the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form

regardless of the setting of this option.

Null Suppression

•

Off (default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.

•

On. Treats nulls as blank spaces.

FF Validity

Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution.

•

Off (default). Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print

position in a line or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command

at any other position is recognized as a space.

•

On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the

data stream.

Auto Skip At End

Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a

print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed

function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option.

•

Off (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line.

•

On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next

form.

Coax Emulation

133

FF After Job

Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print

screen function).

•

Off (default). Performs an automatic new line command after completing

a print buffer (unless a new line, form feed, or carriage return command

was the last one executed). The printer is set to print at print position 1 of

the next line.

•

On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was

the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the

first line on the next form.

CR, EM, & NL (3287 only)

CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that

the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as

control codes.

•

On (default). Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as control codes.

•

Off. Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as spaces.

Translate Table

Defines which translate table to use for printing.

•

Default (default). Translates data by using the default table of the current

character set.

•

Downloaded. Translates data from EBCDIC to internal code by using the

downloaded translate table.

Host Override

Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or

continues to use the current operator panel settings.

•

Disable (default). Allows the following host commands to override

operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI),

characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the

information appearing on the message display may not match the data

stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable

option.

•

Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.

Format Control

Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after

absolute and relative move commands are executed.

•

Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature,

IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the

new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).

•

Enable. Does not reflect distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature,

IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the

new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).

134

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Max. Print Width

Set the maximum print width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of

the printer. The default is 13.2 inches.

Buffer Print

•

Disable (default). The printer will print normally.

•

Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received

from the host as hex values. Refer to page 285 for information on how to

obtain a hex code printout.

NOTE: Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host

computer. A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print

from enable to disable.

Twinax Params

135

Twinax Params

CTHI

(from page 124)

Char Set

Select

Active Char

Set

Prt Partial

Line

Device ID Device

Address

(see page 136) Secondary Set*

Primary Set

Enable*

Disable

IPDS*

5225

4234-2

Address 1*

Address (0-6)

Standard Char*

Extended Char

Lead-in Chars

Set 1 <%>*

Set 2 ¬¬$

Set 3 _%_

User Defined

Usr Defined HTRN

Start Code 1

5F* (40-FF)

Start Code 2

5F* (40-FF)

Stop Code

5B* (40-FF)

Alt. Set 80-9F

Printable*

Control Code

Enable*

Disable

60*

(40-FE hex)

* = Factory Default

Standard*

Twinax

Params

Set Text

Orientn

Host

Override

Format

Control

Max. Print

Width

Control By Host*

Left to Right

Right to Left

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

13.2 inches*

Printer Width

Buffer

Disable*

Enable

Graphic Chek

Err

Graphic Chek

Cod

Cancel

IGP/DCU

Enable*

Disable

PTX

Transparent

5225 World

Trade

Enable*

Disable

LAC Option

On*

Off

LAC

Approx.

136

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

* = Factory Default

Char Set Select

(from page 135)

Primary

Sets

Secondary

Sets

0037 English US*

0037 Eng Nether

0500 Swiss Bil

0500 Belg. New

0273 Austr/Germ

0274 Belg. Old

0275 Brazilian

0260 Canad Fren

0277 Danish

0278 Finnish

0297 French

0280 Italian

0281 Japan. Eng

0282 Portuguese

0284 Span Speak

0285 English UK

0892 OCR A

0893 OCR B

0424 Hebrew

0803 Hebrew Old

0420 Arabic

0880 Cyril. Old

0423 Greek Old

0875 Gr New Euro

0871 Icelandic

0290 Japan Kata

0870 Latin 2

0838 Thai

1026 Turkish

0890 Yugos. Old

1097 Farsi

1025 Cyrillic

0256 Intern. 1

1112 Balt Mult

0924 Euro Latin-9

1122 Estonian

1140 Euro Eng.

1141 Euro Aust.

1142 Euro Dan.

1143 Euro Finn.

1144 Euro Ital.

1145 Euro Span.

1146 Euro UK.

1147 Euro Fren.

1148 Euro Swiss

1149 Euro Ice.

0500 Internat 5

English US*

Austrian/German

Belgian

Brazilian

Canadian French

Danish/Norweg.

Finnish/Swedish

French

Italian

Japanese Eng.

Japanese Katak.

Portuguese

Spanish

Spanish Speak.

English UK

Old Hebrew

Hebrew

Farsi/Latin

Greek Old

Greek New

Arabic

Turkish

Latin 2/ROECE

Yugoslavian

Multinational

Twinax Params

137

Char Set Select

Specifies the print language used by the printer. Character sets are shown in

detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

Active Char Set

This option selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will

be active. Secondary Set is the default.

Prt Partial Line

•

Enable (default). Forces the printer to print a partial line (i.e., line not

ending with a LF) before moving to the top of form on the next page.

•

Disable. The last partial line of data will not be printed.

Device ID

This parameter defines the printer emulation as IPDS, 5225, or 4234-2. After

the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host. IPDS is

the default.

Device Address

Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6. The host directs data

and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique

device address. After the address has been changed, a POR status is sent to

the host.

5225 World Trade

The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character set that serves as

a base and 14 extended world trade character set assortments.

Cancel IGP/DCU

•

Enable (default). Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the

host or the CANCEL key is pressed.

•

Disable. Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is

put on hold from the host or the CANCEL key is pressed.

138

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

PTX Transparent

Lead-in Chars

You can enable additional features that are not available in standard Twinax

emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data

stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Three sets (each

containing a start and end code) are available:

•

Set 1. start code: <%

stop code: >

•

Set 2. start code:

¬¬

stop code: $

•

Set 3. start code: _%

stop code: _

•

User Defined

Usr Defined HTRN

This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character.

This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the

Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for

the User Defined option:

•

Start Code 1 5F

•

Start Code 2 5F

•

Stop Code 5B

Alt. Set 80-9F

•

Printable (default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

•

Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a

control code.

Graphic Chek Err

Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action)

command. For more information about the SGEA command, refer to the

Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual.

•

Enable (default). The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer. If the

SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the printer will

stop when a graphic error is detected.

•

Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not

stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character

selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter.

Twinax Params

139

Graphic Chek Cod

Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable

character that is received from the host. Choose a hex character from 40

through FE. The character becomes the printer default when:

•

the printer is powered off and then powered on;

•

an SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default;

•

the Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled.

LAC Option

Allows the host system to load alternate character images into the printer.

This may be used for designing graphics, barcodes, and charts, or for printing

in foreign languages.

•

Enable (default). Prints the LAC character as defined.

•

Disable. Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the

currently selected character set.

LAC Approx.

A process that reorganizes columns of dots so that clean, readable printing is

possible.

•

On (default). Converts the emulated character cells to standard cells for

the P7224 model.

•

Off. Converts character cells byte by byte and not by LAC approximation.

Set Text Orientn

Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This

allows the printer to print languages that are printed right to left instead of left

to right. The options include:

•

Control By Host (default)

•

Left to Right

•

Right to Left

Host Override

Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or

continues to use the current operator panel settings.

•

Disable (default). Allows the following host commands to override

operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI),

characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the

information appearing on the message display may not match the data

stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable

option.

•

Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.

NOTE: Host margin and tab settings will take precedence whether or not

Host Override is enabled.

140

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Format Control

Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after

absolute and relative move commands are executed.

•

Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature,

IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the

new position (after absolute and relative move commands are executed).

•

Enable. Does not reflect distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature,

IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the

new position (after absolute and relative move commands are executed).

Max. Print Width

Set the maximum print width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of

the printer. The default is 13.2 inches.

Buffer Print

•

Disable (default). The printer will print normally.

•

Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received

from the host as hex values. Refer to page 285 for information on how to

obtain a hex code printout.

NOTE: Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host

computer. A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print

from enable to disable.

3270 Params

141

3270 Params

3270

Params

(from page 124)

Char Set

Select

(see page 142)

Translation

Tbl

Prt Partial

Line

Enable*

Disable

PTX

Transparent

Lead-in Chars

Set 1 <%>*

Set 2 ¬¬$

Set 3 _%_

User Defined

Usr Defined HTRN

Start Code 1*

Start Code 2

Stop Code

Alt. Set 80-9F

Printable*

Control Code

Host

Override

Disable*

Enable

Format

Control

Disable*

Enable

Change

Case

Left to Right*

Right to Left

Set Text

Orientn

Send to Host*

Do Not Send

Intervention

Req

Compatibility

Max. Print

Width

13.2 inches*

Printer Width

CR At MPP + 1

On*

Off

NL At MPP + 1

On*

Off

Position Aft FF

On*

Off

Last Char = FF

On*

Off

Null Suppression

Off*

FF Validity

Off*

Auto Skip At End

Off*

FF After Job

Off*

CR, EM, & NL

On*

Off

Dual Case*

Mono Case

Active Char

Set

Secondary Sets*

Primary Sets*

Early Print

Cmpl

Disable*

Enable

* = Factory Default

This menu appears only if the TN3270 option is installed.

142

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

* = Factory Default

3270

Params

Primary Sets

0037 English US*

0037 Eng Nether

0285 English UK

0273 Austr/Germ

0274 Belg. Old

0275 Brazilian

0260 Canad Fren

0277 Danish

0287 Danish Alt

0278 Finnish

0288 Finn. Alt

0297 French

0500 Internat 5

0280 Italian

0281 Japan. Eng

0282 Portuguese

0284 Span Speak

0289 Span. Alt

0500 Swiss Bil

0500 Belg. New

0803 Hebrew Old

0424 Hebrew

0892 ORC A

0893 ORC B

0420 Arabic

0880 Cyril. Old

0423 Greek Old

0875 Gr New Euro

0871 Icelandic

0290 Japan Katak

0870 Latin 2

0838 Thai

1026 Turkish

0890 Yugos. Old

1097 Farsi

1025 Cyrillic

0905 Turk. Old

0256 Intern. 1

0924 Euro Lat-9

1140 Euro Eng.

1141 Euro Aust.

1142 Euro Dan.

1143 Euro Finn.

1144 Euro Ital.

1145 Euro Span.

1146 Euro UK

1147 Euro Fren.

1148 Euro Swiss

1149 Euro Ice.

Char Set Select

(from page 141)

Secondary Sets

English US*

English UK

Austrian/German

German (Alt)

Belgian

Brazilian

Canadian French

Danish/Norweg.

Danish (Alt)

Finnish/Swedish

Finnish (Alt)

French

International

Italian

Japanese Eng.

Japanese Katak.

Portuguese

Portug. (Alt)

Spanish

Spanish (Alt)

Spanish Speak.

Swiss Fren/Ger

Old Hebrew

Hebrew

Farsi/Latin

Greek Old

Greek New

Arabic

Turkish

Turkish Old

Latin 2/ROECE

Yugoslavian

3270 Params

143

Translation Tbl

Prints out a table of the Coax interface’s current character set. This operation

is valid only when the TN3270 interface is the current interface.

Active Char Set

Specifies which character language set will be the active set.

•

Secondary Sets (default)

•

Primary Sets

Prt Partial Line

•

Enable (default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer to print

if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).

•

Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.

Early Print Cmpl

Early Print Complete allows the printer to send Print Complete status to the

host before the printer is actually done printing all data. Early Print Complete

is only available if the IPDS feature is installed.

•

Disable (default). Means the printer will suppress the Early Print

Complete response until all printing is complete.

•

Enable. Means the printer will send an acknowledgement to the host

when it is able to accept more data.

NOTE: When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, the

data in the printer will remain in the buffer (regardless of the setting of

the Cancel Buffer option). It is recommended that local procedures be

followed to recover from the error.

Do not select Early Print Complete while a print job is in progress. If

this is done you will need to restart the printer.

PTX Transparent

Lead-in Chars

You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through

standard TN3270 emulations. To access these features, send text commands

in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets

are available:

•

Set 1. start code: <% (default)

stop code: >

•

Set 2. start code:

¬¬

stop code: $

•

Set 3. start code: _%

stop code: _

•

User Defined.

144

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Usr Defined HTRN

This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII

character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for

the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes

for the User Defined option:

•

Start Code 1 5F (default)

•

Start Code 2 5F

•

Stop Code 5B

Alt. Set 80-9F

•

Printable (default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

•

Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a

control code.

Change Case

Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in non-

SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed

online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of

the following “right to left” sets: Katak., Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi.

SCS (System Network Architecture Character String) mode is controlled by

the host computer.

•

Dual Case (default)

•

Mono Case

Set Text Orientn

Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This

allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of

left to right.

•

Left to Right (default).

•

Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be

notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.

Intervention Req

Select from the following:

•

Send To Host (default). The printer sends a signal to the host computer

when any of the following occur:

•

Printer faults occur.

•

Hold mode time–out occurs.

•

Not Send To Host

If not selected, the printer will only send the signal on printer faults that cause

data loss (paper jam, ribbon stall, online platen open, etc.).

3270 Params

145

Compatibility Op

The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the

non-SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated.

CR At MPP+1

MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This

option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1.

•

On (default). Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the

next line.

•

Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line.

NL At MPP+1

Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.

•

On (default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from the

current position.

•

Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.

Position Aft FF (4234 only)

Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed

command is sent.

•

On (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line

on the next form.

•

Off. Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the

next form.

Last Char = FF

Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code

encountered in the print buffer.

•

On (default). Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next

form.

•

Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form.

NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on.

If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer,

the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form

regardless of the setting of this option.

Null Suppression

•

Off (default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.

•

On. Treats nulls as blank spaces.

146

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

FF Validity

Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution.

•

Off (default). Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print

position in a line or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command

at any other position is recognized as a space.

•

On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the

data stream.

Auto Skip At End

Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a

print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed

function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option.

•

Off (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line.

•

On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next

form.

FF After Job

Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print

screen function).

•

Off (default). Performs an automatic new line command after completing

a print buffer (unless a new line, form feed, or carriage return command

was the last one executed). The printer is set to print at print position 1 of

the next line.

•

On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was

the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the

first line on the next form.

CR, EM, and NL (3287 only)

CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that

the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as

control codes.

•

On (default). Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as control codes.

•

Off. Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as spaces.

Host Override

Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,

or continues to use the current operator panel settings.

•

Disable (default). Allows these host commands to override operator

panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters

per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information

appearing on the message display may not match the data stream

setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option.

•

Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.

3270 Params

147

Format Control

Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after

absolute and relative move commands are executed.

•

Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL

feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position

(after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).

•

Enable.

Max. Print Width

Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host

interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the

printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be

truncated.

•

13.2 inches (default)

•

Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)

148

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

5250 Params

5250

Params

(from page 124)

Char Set

Select

(see page 149)

Translation

Tbl

Active Char

Set

Secondary Set*

Primary Set

Prt Partial

Line

Enable*

Disable

PTX

Transparent

Lead-in Chars

Set 1 <%>*

Set 2 ¬¬$

Set 3 _%_

User Defined

Usr Defined HTRN

Start Code 1*

Start Code 2

Stop Code

Alt. Set 80-9F

Printable*

Control Code

Enable*

Disable

Max. Print

Width

13.2 inches*

Printer Width

Graphic

Chek Err

60*

40-FE

Graphic

Chek Cod

Left to Right*

Right to Left

Set Text

Orientn

Disable*

Enable

Host

Override

Disable*

Enable

Format

Control

* = Factory Default

This menu appears only if the TN5250 option is installed.

5250 Params

149

0037 English US*

0037 Eng Nether

0500 Swiss Bil

0500 Belg. New

0273 Austr/Germ

0274 Belg. Old

0275 Brazilian

0260 Canad Fren

0277 Danish

0278 Finnish

0297 French

0280 Italian

0281 Japan. Eng

0282 Portuguese

0284 Span Speak

0285 English UK

0892 OCR A

0893 OCR B

0424 Hebrew

0803 Hebrew Old

0420 Arabic

0880 Cyril. Old

0423 Greek Old

875 Gr New Euro

0871 Icelandic

0290 Japan Kata

0870 Latin 2

0838 Thai

1026 Turkish

0890 Yugos. Old

1097 Farsi

1025 Cyrillic

0256 Intern. 1

1112 Balt Mult

0924 Euro Lat-9

1122 Estonian

1140 Euro Eng.

1141 Euro Aust.

1142 Euro Dan.

1143 Euro Finn.

1144 Euro Ital.

1145 Euro Span.

1146 Euro UK

1147 Euro Fren.

1148 Euro Swiss

1149 Euro Ice.

0500 Internat 5

* = Factory Default

5250

Params

Primary Sets Secondary Sets

English US*

Austrian/German

Belgian

Brazilian

Canadian French

Danish/Norweg.

Finnish/Swedish

French

Italian

Japanese Eng.

Japanese Katak.

Portuguese

Spanish

Spanish Speak.

English UK

Old Hebrew

Hebrew

Farsi/Latin

Greek Old

Greek New

Arabic

Turkish

Latin 2/ROECE

Yugoslavian

Multinational

Char Set Select

(from page 148)

150

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Translation Tbl

Prints out a table of the TN5250 interface’s current character set. This

operation is valid only when the TN5250 interface is the current interface.

Active Char Set

Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active.

•

Secondary Set (default)

•

Primary Set

Prt Partial Line

•

Enable (default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer to print

if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF).

•

Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed.

PTX Transparent

Lead-in Chars

You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through

standard TN5250 emulations. To access these features, send text commands

in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets

are available:

•

Set 1. start code: <% (default)

stop code: >

•

Set 2. start code:

¬¬

stop code: $

•

Set 3. start code: _%

stop code: _

•

User Defined.

Usr Defined HTRN

This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII

character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for

the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes

for the User Defined option:

•

Start Code 1 5F (default)

•

Start Code 2 5F

•

Stop Code 5B

Alt. Set 80-9F

•

Printable (default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

•

Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a

control code.

5250 Params

151

Graphic Chek Err

Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action)

command. For more information about the SGEA command, refer to the

Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual.

•

Enable (default). The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer. If the

SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the printer will

stop when a graphic error is detected.

•

Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not

stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character

selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter.

Graphic Chek Cod

Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable

character that is received from the host. Choose a hex character from 40

through FE. The character becomes the printer default when:

•

The printer is powered off and then powered on.

•

An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default.

•

The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled.

The value can be the following:

•

60 (default)

•

40 – F4

Set Text Orientn

Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This

allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of

left to right.

•

Left to Right (default)

•

Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be

notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online.

Host Override

Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host,

or continues to use the current operator panel settings.

•

Disable (default). Allows these host commands to override operator

panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters

per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information

appearing on the message display may not match the data stream

setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option.

•

Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands.

152

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

Format Control

Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after

absolute and relative move commands are executed.

•

Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL

feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position

(after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed).

•

Enable.

Max. Print Width

Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host

interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the

printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be

truncated.

•

13.2 Inches (default)

•

Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer)

SPC Coax Params

CTHI

(from page 124)

Logical Buf

Size

PA1 PA2 Buffer

Reprint

SPC

Null Supp

1920*

960

2560

3440

3564

Send to Host*

Do Not Send

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

Option needs to be selected

Simp Prot

Conv

SPC Coax

Params

NL At

MPP+1

On*

Off

Intervention

Req

Buffer Print Translation

Tbl

Column 132

Wrap

Start Code 1

Start Code 2

Stop Code

Usr Defined

HTRN

SPC

Space Supp

Disable*

Enable

SPC Coax Params

153

Logical Buf Size

Refers to the size of the printer buffer, which should be set the same as the

host screen (buffer) size. If the host screen size is unknown, use 1920. Do not

change this parameter in the middle of a print job.

Intervention Req

•

Send to Host (default). The printer sends a signal to the host computer

when the CANCEL key is pressed or a printer fault or hold mode time-out

occurs.

•

Do Not Send. No signal will be sent to the host computer.

Buffer Print

•

Disable (default). The printer will print normally.

•

Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received

from the host as hex values. Refer to page 285 for information on how to

obtain a hex code printout.

Translation Tbl

Prints a table of the Coax interface's current character set. This operation is

valid only when the Coax interface is selected (see

ΗΟΣΤ ΙΝΤΕΡΦΑΧΕ

Μενυ ον παγε 87

Column 132 Wrap

When enabled, this option causes the printer to line wrap at 132 characters

despite the current print density, allowing more characters per line. The

options include:

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable

Usr Defined HTRN

This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character.

This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the

Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for

the User Defined option:

•

Start Code 1 5F

•

Start Code 2 5F

•

Stop Code 5B

PA1

PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the Coax Systems

Network Architecture Character String (SCS) data stream is active. This

function displays the “PA1 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is

pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is

placed online. Refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual for

more information about SCS.

154

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

PA2

PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the OFFLINE state and the Coax SCS

data stream is active. This function displays the “PA2 ENABLED” message

when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the

host when the printer is placed ONLINE.

Buffer Reprint

This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode. When the

ENTER key is pressed, “Buffer Reprint Enabled” is displayed and an

Intervention Required status is sent to the host. Pressing ENTER again

cancels the Buffer Reprint function and “Buffer Reprint Disabled” is displayed.

SPC Null Supp

•

Enable (default). Treats nulls as blank spaces.

•

Disable. Ignores nulls. The print position does not move.

SPC Space Supp

This option is only available in Coax SPC emulation and is used in LU3/DSC/

DSE mode only.

•

Disable (default). Treats nulls and spaces normally.

•

Enable. If the entire line consists of spaces and nulls, the line will be

discarded.

NL At MPP+1

Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line.

•

On (default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from the

current position.

•

Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line.

SPC Twx Params

155

SPC Twx Params

NOTE: To access the SPC Twinax Params menu, be sure to select the

Twinax option in the Host Interface menu.

Device Address

Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6. The host directs data

and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique

device address. After the address has been changed, a POR status is sent to

the host.

Disable*

Enable

CTHI

(from page 124)

Device

Address

SPC Type Translation

Tbl

Buffer Print

MODE

219*

MODE

P5000

MODE

IBM

Address 1*

Address (0-6)

Printer Type

Impact/P-Series*

STD Centronics

IGP/VGL

IGP/PGL

SFCC Char

Logical Not*

Caret (^)

User Defined

User Defined HTRN

Start Code 1

Start Code 2

Stop Code

EVFU

Enable*

Disable

SPC Char Set

Multinational*

Austrian/German

Belgian

Canadian French

Danish/Norweg.

French

Spanish

English US

SPC Char Set

0500 Internat 5*

0037 English US

0273 Austr/Germ

0274 Belg. Old

0275 Brazilian

0260 Canad Fren

0277 Danish

0278 Finnish

0297 French

0280 Italian

0281 Japan. Eng

0290 Japan Kata

0282 Portuguese

0284 Span Speak

0285 English UK

SFCC Char

Logical Not*

Caret (^)

User Defined

User Defined HTRN

Start Code 1

Stop Code

SPC Char Set

0500 Internat 5*

0037 English US

0273 Austr/Germ

0274 Belg. Old

0275 Brazilian

0260 Canad Fren

0277 Danish

0278 Finnish

0297 French

0280 Italian

0281 Japan. Eng

0290 Japan Kata

0282 Portuguese

0284 Span Speak

0285 English UK

SFCC Char

Logical Not*

Caret (^)

User Defined

User Defined HTRN

Start Code 1

Stop Code

* = Factory Default

Simp Prot

Conv

SPC Twinax

Params

156

Chapter 4

Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation

SPC Type

Allows you to select a specific type of Simple Protocol Convertor (SPC)

Twinax emulation: MODE 219 for Model 219 protocol convertor, MODE

P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor, and MODE IBM for the IBM protocol

convertor.

Printer Type

Determines the SPC Twinax emulation “Mode.” When set to Std Centronics,

IGP/VGL, or IGP/PGL, the Set Line Density and Set Print Density commands

are translated into a Carriage Return (CR), and vertical format commands are

ignored unless the EVFU is enabled.

SFCC Char

Determines what character is printed when an EBCDIC Logical Not character

¬ (Hex 5F) is received from the host.

User Defined HTRN

This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character.

This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the

Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for

the User Defined option:

•

Start Code 1

•

Start Code 2

•

Stop Code

EVFU

•

Enable. The EVFU parameter allows vertical format control by the host in

all four printer type modes.

•

Disable. Vertical format control is only allowed in

IMPACT/P-SERIES mode.

SPC Char Set

Allows you to select the print language character set.

Translation Tbl

Prints out a table of the Twinax interface's current character set. This

operation is valid only when the Twinax interface is selected.

Buffer Print

•

Disable (default). The printer will print normally.

•

Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received

from the host as hex values. Refer to page 285 for information on how to

obtain a hex code printout.

157

LinePrinter Plus Emulation

NOTE: When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params, no

LP+ menu items will take effect on the same offline. The LP+

Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline.

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Printer

Protocol

CPI/LPI

Select

Host

Command

Font

Attributes

Page

Format

Print Char.

Set

Reset Cmd

CFG Ld

(see page 158) Select CPI

6.0 CPI

10.0 CPI*

12.0 CPI

13.3 CPI

15.0 CPI

17.1 CPI

20.0 CPI

Select LPI

6.0 LPI*

8.0 LPI

10.3 LPI

P/S Mode CPI

Changed*

Unchanged

Enable*

Ignore All

Ignore CPI

Ignore LPI

Ignore Unidir.

(see page 158) (see page 158)

Disable*

Power up config

Current config

Factory config

* = Factory Default

LinePrinter+

Set

Substitution

Inactive*

Active

Barcode

x-offset

Disable*

Enable

Barcode

Height

Disable*

Enable

LinePrinter Plus Emulation

158

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation

Printer

Protocol

(from page 157)

P-Series* P-Series

Serial

Matrix

Proprinter

Epson

(see page 164) (see page 172) (see page 174) (see page 179) (see page 183)

Font Attributes

(from page 157)

Typeface Prop.

Spacing

Bold Print Italic Print Slashed

Zero

Text

Position

Data Processing*

NLQ

OCR-A

OCR-B

High Speed

NLQ Sans Serif

High Speed 100

NLQ 200

DP 200

High Speed 64

BARCODE 145

BARCODE 160

DP 144

High Speed 144

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Forward Slant

Backward Slant

Disable*

Enable

Top of Line*

Bottom of Line

Page Format

(from page 157)

Form

Length

Form

Width

Margins Perforation

Skip

Abs. Length IN

11.0* inches

(0.1-24)

Abs. Length MM

279.4* mm

(0.1-609.6)

Funct. of Lines

88* lines

(1-192)

Abs. Width IN

13.6* inches

(0.1-13.6)

Abs. Width MM

345.4* mm

(0.1-345.4)

Function of CPI

136

characters

(1-272)

Left Margin

0* columns

(0-369)

Right Margin

0* columns

(0-369)

Bottom Margin

0* lines

(0-451)

Disable*

1/2 Inch

2/3 Inch

5/6 Inch

1 inch

* = Factory Default

These menus do not appear if the Coax or Twinax host interface is selected.

See page 87.

This value is 132 if the Coax or Twinax host interface is selected.

159

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

NOTE: When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params, no

LP+ menu items will take effect on the same offline. The LP+

Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline.

Printer Protocol

Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus

Programmer's Reference Manual for more information.

CPI/LPI Select

This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) and lines per

inch (lpi) values.

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Printer

Protocol

CPI/LPI

Select

Font

Attributes

Page

Format

Print Char.

Set

Reset Cmd

CFG Ld

(see page 158) Select CPI

10.0 CPI*

12.0 CPI

13.3 CPI

15.0 CPI

17.1 CPI

20.0 CPI

Select LPI

6.0 LPI*

8.0 LPI

10.3 LPI

Typeface

Data Processing

NLQ

OCR-A

OCR-B

High Speed

NLQ San Serif

Prop. Spacing

Disable*

Enable

Bold Print

Disable*

Enable

Italic Print

Disable*

Forward Slant

Backward Slant

Slashed Zero

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Power up config

Current config

Factory config

* = Factory Default

LinePrinter+

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

160

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Host Command

This parameter allows you to block certain host commands from being

acknowledged by the printer.

•

Enable (default). All host commands are acknowledged by the printer.

•

Ignore All. All host commands are ignored by the printer.

•

Ignore CPI. All CPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the

printer.

•

Ignore LPI. All LPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer.

•

Ignore Unidir. All Unidirectional commands sent by the host are ignored

by the printer.

Font Attributes

Typeface

•

Data Processing (default). A general purpose font printing out at

120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. The width of the font will vary

with each cpi.

•

NLQ. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and

96 dpi vertically. This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with

the cpi.

•

OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi

horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.

•

High Speed. A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi

vertically. The width of the font varies with the cpi.

•

NLQ Sans Serif. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96

dpi vertically. This font prints without serifs. The width of the font varies

with the cpi.

•

High Speed 100. A draft quality font printing at 100 dpi horizontally and

48 dpi vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 10 cpi.

The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.

•

NLQ 200. This NLQ font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 96 vertically.

When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then

be varied, but the width will not change.

•

DP 200. This Data Processing font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 72

vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi

can then be varied, but the width will not change.

•

High Speed 64. This font prints at 120 dpi horizontally and 64 vertically.

When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to

10 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.

•

BARCODE 145. This Data Processing font prints at 145 dpi horizontally

and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi.

The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.

•

BARCODE 160. This Data Processing font prints at 160 dpi horizontally

and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 13 cpi.

The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change.

161

Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)

Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the

character cell includes the character and the space around the character.

•

Disable (default). Each character cell is printed with the same width.

Each column in the printed text will line up.

•

Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the

character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using

proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed

documents, which gives text a typeset appearance.

Bold Print

•

Disable (default). Text is printed normally.

•

Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.

Italic Print

•

Disable (default). Text is printed normally.

•

Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.

•

Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.

Slashed Zero

This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.

This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.

•

Disable (default). Zero is printed without a slash.

•

Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

162

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Text Position

Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space. When set to

Top-of-Line, text will be positioned at the top of the line space. When set to

Bottom-of-Line, the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 lpi

line space. The following example shows both Top-of-Line and Bottom-of-Line

text positions:

Page Format

Form Length

Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set

the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi

(lines per inch).

Form Width

The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the

current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the

actual paper width.

Margins

•

Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge

of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.

•

Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right

edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.

•

Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of

the page and incrementing from the bottom up.

Perforation Skip

•

Disable (default). Allows printing on page perforation.

•

1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, 1 inch. You may set up a skip-over margin of

1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1 inch. For example, a skip-over margin of

1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page.

Top of Linespace

Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace

Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace

Dot

Row

Text Position

Top of Line Text Position

Bottom of Line

Text Position

Top-of-Line Text Position

Bottom-of-Line

163

Print Char. Set

When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, the current

character set is printed.

Reset Cmd CFG Ld

When the printer receives a host data stream reset command

(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected

configuration is loaded.

•

Disable (default). The active emulation parameters are loaded when the

reset command is executed.

•

Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset

command is executed.

•

Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the

reset command is executed.

•

Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the

reset command is executed.

Set Substitution

When this option is activated, the character set overlay in RAM is activated.

This can also be accomplished through a host command of SFCC RX. In

either case, a flag is set indicating that the substitution table is active. If the

power-up configuration has Ld Set at Pwrup and Set Substitution both

enabled, the character set overlay is automatically activated at power-up or

during a soft reset. See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual

for more information.

Barcode x-offset

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable. Allows text to print next to a barcode when xxxx and yyyy are not

set to the origin.

Barcode Height

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable. If Barcode x-offset is enabled, the barcode height follows P5000

legacy barcode behavior.

164

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

P-Series Emulation

P-Series Emulation (with PCL-II)

Printer

Protocol

(from page 164)

Control Code

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Overstrike Define LF

Code

P-Series

SFCC

VFU Select Alt. Set

80-9F

Character

Set

SFCC d

Command

PSeries Dbl

High

8.0 LPI*

10.3 LPI

6.0 LPI

Elongated*

Backspace

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

LF = CR + LF*

LF = LF

(0-7F hex)

EVFU*

DVFU

CVFU

Disable

Control Code*

Printable

(see page 168) Even dot plot*

Double high

Normal*

P3/4/6/9 Compat

* = Factory Default

P-Series

FF valid

at TOF

Enable*

Disable

Printer

Protocol

(from page 164)

Control Code

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Overstrike Define LF

Code

P-Series

SFCC

EVFU Select Alt. Set

80-9F

Character

Set

8.0 LPI*

10.3 LPI

6.0 LPI

Elongated*

Backspace

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

LF = CR + LF*

LF = LF

(0-7F hex)

Enable*

Disable

Control Code*

Printable

(see page 170)

* = Factory Default

P-Series

P-Series Emulation (With LG)

165

P-Series Emulation (With LG)

Control Code 06

Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can

select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.

Control Code 08

Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can

define the code to output the following character:

•

Elongated (default).

•

Backspace.

Define CR Code

This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage

Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each

time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed

code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host

computer sends Line feeds to the printer.

•

CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage

return.

•

CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The

next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.

Printer

Protocol

(from page 165)

Control Code

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Overstrike Define LF

Code

P-Series

SFCC

EVFU Select Alt. Set

80-9F

Character

Set

8.0 LPI*

10.3 LPI

6.0 LPI

Elongated*

Backspace

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

LF = CR + LF*

LF = LF

(0-7F hex)

Enable*

Disable

Control Code*

Printable

(see page 171)

* = Factory Default

P-Series

SFCC d

Command

Even dot plot*

Double high

166

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Auto LF

This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the

forms width setting.

•

Disable (default). Discards any data past the forms width.

•

Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is

received past the forms width, causing the excess text to print on the next

line.

Overstrike

This option enables you to print bold characters.

•

Enable (disable). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing

slows down the printer.

•

Disable. Turns off bold print.

Define LF Code

•

LF = CR + LF (default). Forces an automatic carriage return with each

line feed command. The next print position is print position 1 of the next

line.

•

LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print

position will be the current print position of the next line.

P-Series SFCC

This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter.

P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:

•

ESC (hex 1B)

•

SOH (hex 01)

•

ETX (hex 03)

•

CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^)

•

TILDE (hex 7E)—(~)

NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~)

are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data

stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will

occur.

P-Series Emulation (With LG)

167

VFU Select

Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.

•

EVFU (default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).

•

DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct

Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).

•

CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct

Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).

•

Disable. Disables all VFU processing.

Alt. Set 80-9F

Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex

9F as control codes or as printable characters. The options include:

•

Control Code (default)

•

Printable.

Character Set

Specifies a character set as shown in the

Π−Σεριεσ Χηαραχτερ Σετ

Μενυ ον παγε 168

. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group

heading (such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the

desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the

group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8

selection allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are

shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

SFCC d Command

•

Even dot plot (default). This option interprets SFCC d Command as even

dot plot.

•

Double High. This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high.

Select this option for backward compatibility.

PSeries Dbl High

Allows printing compatibility between current and older model printers.

•

Normal (default). This is normal, double-high printing for current model

printers.

•

P3/4/6/9 Compat. Where older printers print two dot rows higher, this

option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match

the current models dot row value (two dot rows lower).

FF Valid at TOF

•

Enable (default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed

command and the printer is at the top of form.

•

Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed

command and the printer is at the top of form.

168

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

P-Series Character Set Menu

Latin 2 8859-2*

Latin 2 852

Mazovia

Kamenicky

Roman 8

PC-437 Slavic

Slavic 1250

Code Page 865

Code Page 860

Latin 1 8859-1

Latin 5 8859-9

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Win. CP 1250

Win. CP 1252

Win. CP 1257

CP 858 EURO

Lith. CP 773

Serbo Croatic 1

Serbo Croatic 2

CP 774

CP 775

ISO 8859-4

DEC 256 Greek*

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 851

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

Win. CP 1253

Greek 813 EURO

Greek 869 EURO

Character Set

(from page 164)

Arabic

Sets

Cyrillic

Sets

European

Sets

Greek

Sets

Hebrew

Sets

Turkish

Sets

Misc.

Sets

ASMO 449*

ASMO 449+

ASMO 708

ASMO 708+

MS DOS CP710

MS DOS CP720

Sakr CP714

Aptec CP715

CP 786

Arabic CP 864

Arabic CP 1046

Arabic Lam 1

Arabic Lam 2

Win. CP 1256

Farsi 1

Farsi 2

1098 Farsi 1285

Cyrillic 866*

Cyrillic CP 437

Cyrillic 113

Cyrillic 8859-5

ISO 915

Code Page 855

7-bit Cyrillic

Ukrainian

Bulgarian

Win. CP 1251

Latvian 866

CP 1048

Hebrew Old*

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

Latin-1 Hebrew

Win. CP 1255

Data Gen. Turk.*

DEC Turkish

IBM Turkish

Siemens Turkish

PTT Turkish

IBC Turkish

Bull Turkish

AS400 Turkish

Unisys Turkish

NCR Turkish

PST Turkish

UNIS-1 Turkish

Code Page 853

INFO Turkish

Win. CP 1254

Code Page 857

Azeri

Block-set 10cpi*

Italics Set

Scanblock 10cpi

PGL Thai Set

Standard

Sets

See page 169.

UTF-8

* = Factory Default

P-Series Emulation (With LG)

169

Standard

Sets*

IBM PC* Multinational ECMA Latin 1

Primary Subset

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Latin American

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin Am II

Extended Subset

Code Page 437*

Code Page 850

ASCII (USA)*

EBCDIC

Primary Subset

ASCII (USA)*

German

Swedish

Danish

Norwegian

Finnish

English

Dutch

French

Spanish

Italian

Turkish

Japanese

Extended Subset

Multinational*

Barcode 10 cpi

Mult. DP 10 cpi

Mult. DP 12 cpi

Mult. LQ 10 cpi

Greek DP 10 cpi

Greek DP 12 cpi

Greek LQ 10 cpi

Grap. DP 10 cpi

Grap. LQ 10 cpi

Sci. DP 10 cpi

Sci. DP 12 cpi

Sci. LQ 10 cpi

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Norw./Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Dutch

Finnish

Swiss

CP 858

EURO

Character Set

(P-Series)

(from page 164)

DEC Mult.

170

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

P-Series Character Set Menu (with PCL-II)

Character Set

(from page 164)

IBM PC*

Primary Subset

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Latin American

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin Am II

Extended Subset

Code Page 437*

Code Page 850

Extended Subset

Multinational

ASCII (USA)*

EBCDIC

ECMA Latin 1

DEC Mult.

OCR-A

OCR-B

Latin 2 8859-2

Latin 2 852

Bulgarian

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

DEC 256 Greek

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

PC851 LtGk [12G]

Greek-7 [12N]

Greek-8 [8G]

Hebrew Old

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

* = Factory Default

P-Series Emulation (With LG)

171

P-Series Character Set Menu (with LG)

Character Set

(from page 165)

IBM PC*

Primary Subset

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Latin American

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin Am II

Extended Subset

Code Page 437

Code Page 850

Multinational

ASCII (USA)*

EBCDIC

ECMA Latin 1

Primary Subset

ASCII (USA)*

German

Swedish

Danish

Norweigian

Finnish

English

Dutch

French

Spanish

Italian

Turkish

Japanese

Extended Subset

Multinational*

Barcode 10 CPI

Mult. DP 10 CPI

Mult. DP 12 CPI

Mult. LQ 10 CPI

Greek DP 10 CPI

Greek DP 12 CPI

Greek LQ 10 CPI

Grap. DP 10 CPI

Grap. LQ 10 CPI

Sci. DP 10 CPI

Sci. DP 12 CPI

Sci. LQ 10 CPI

* = Factory Default

DEC Mult.

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Norw./Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Dutch

Finnish

Swiss

OCR-A

OCR-B

Latin 9 8859-15

CP 858 Euro

172

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

P-Series XQ Emulation

Control Code 06

Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can

select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.

Define CR Code

This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage

Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each

time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed

code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host

computer sends line feeds to the printer.

•

CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage

return.

•

CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The

next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.

Auto LF

This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the

forms width setting.

•

Disable (default). Discards any data past the forms width.

•

Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is

received past the forms width.

Printer

Protocol

(from page 158)

Control Code

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Define LF

Code

Compressed Elong/Alt.

Font

HS Print VFU Select Upr. Case

Select

Slew

Relative

8.0 LPI*

10.3 LPI

6.0 LPI

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

LF = CR + LF*

LF = LF

char 01 SOH*

char 03 ETX

char 09 HT

Elng=BS Font=SO*

Elng=SO Font=BS

char 02 STX*

char 03 ETX

char 09 HT

EVFU*

DVFU

CVFU

Disable

Disable*

Enable

1-15 lines*

1-16 lines*

* = Factory Default

P-Series

P-Series XQ Emulation

173

Define LF Code

•

LF = CR + LF (default). Forces an automatic carriage return with each

line feed command received. The next print position is print position 1 of

the next line.

•

LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed

command is received. The next print position will be the current print

position of the next line.

Compressed Print

Controls which host command sets compressed printing.

•

Char 01 SOH (default)

•

Char 03 ETX

•

Char 09 HT

Elong/Alt. Font

Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and

extended character set.

•

Elng=BS Font=SO (default)

•

Elng=SO Font=BS

HS Print (High Speed Print)

Controls which host command sets high speed printing.

•

Char 02 STX (default)

•

Char 03 ETX

•

Char 09 HT

VFU Select

Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting. The choices are:

•

EVFU (default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).

•

DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct

Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU).

•

CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct

Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU).

•

Disable. Disables all VFU processing.

174

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Upr. Case Select

Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the

host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase.

•

Disable (default). Prints lowercase characters received from the host

computer as lowercase, and prints uppercase characters received from

the computer as uppercase.

•

Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as

their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters

received from the computer print as uppercase.

Slew Relative

“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the

number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew

Relative command is received. The options include:

•

1-15 Lines (default)

•

1-16 Lines

Serial Matrix Emulation

Printer

Protocol

(from page 158)

Control Code

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Overstrike Define LF

Code

Printer

Select

Alt. Set

80-9F

Character

Set

ESC d

command

8.0 LPI*

10.3 LPI

6.0 LPI

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

LF = LF*

LF = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

Control Code*

Printable

(see page 177) Even dot plot*

Double high

* = Factory Default

Serial

Matrix

Serial Matrix Emulation

175

Control Code 06

Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can

select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.

Define CR Code

This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage

Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each

time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed

code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host

computer sends line feeds to the printer.

•

CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage

return.

•

CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The

next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.

Auto LF

The Auto LF option defines the printer action when print data is received past

the forms width setting.

•

Enable (default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed

when data is received past the forms width.

•

Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Overstrike

This option enables you to print bold characters.

•

Enable (default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing

slows down the printer.

•

Disable. Turns off bold print.

Define LF Code

•

LF = LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a

line feed command is received. The next print position will be the current

print position of the next line.

•

LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed

command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next

line.

176

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Printer Select

•

Disable (default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.

•

Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and

enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.

Alt. Set 80-9F

•

Control Code (default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through

hex 9F as a control code.

•

Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

Character Set

Specifies a character set as shown in the

Σεριαλ Ματριξ Χηαραχτερ

Σετ Μενυ ον παγε 177

. To use one of these sets, choose the desired

group heading (such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the

desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the

group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character

sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

ESC d command

•

Even dot plot (default). Interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot.

•

Double high. Interprets the ESC d Command as double high. Select this

option for backward compatibility.

Serial Matrix Emulation

177

Serial Matrix Character Set Menu

DEC 256 Greek*

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 851

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

Win. CP 1253

Greek 813 EURO

Greek 869 EURO

Character Set

(from page 174)

Arabic

Sets

Cyrillic

Sets

European

Sets

Greek

Sets

Hebrew

Sets

Turkish

Sets

Misc.

Sets

ASMO 449*

ASMO 449+

ASMO 708

ASMO 708+

MS DOS CP710

MS DOS CP720

Sakr CP714

Aptec CP715

CP 786

Arabic CP 864

Arabic CP 1046

Arabic Lam 1

Arabic Lam 2

Win. CP 1256

Farsi 1

Farsi 2

1098 Farsi 1285

Cyrillic 866*

Cyrillic CP 437

Cyrillic 113

Cyrillic 8859-5

ISO 915

Code Page 855

7-bit Cyrillic

Ukrainian

Bulgarian

Win. CP 1251

Latvian 866

CP 1048

Latin 2 8859-2*

Latin 2 852

Mazovia

Kamenicky

Roman 8

PC-437 Slavic

Slavic 1250

Code Page 865

Code Page 860

Latin 1 8859-1

Latin 5 8859-9

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Win. CP 1250

Win. CP 1252

Win. CP 1257

CP 858 EURO

Lith. CP 773

Serbo Croatic 1

Serbo Croatic 2

CP 774

CP 775

ISO 8859-4

Hebrew Old*

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

Latin-1 Hebrew

Win. CP 1255

Data Gen. Turk.*

DEC Turkish

IBM Turkish

Siemens Turkish

PTT Turkish

IBC Turkish

Bull Turkish

AS400 Turkish

Unisys Turkish

NCR Turkish

PST Turkish

UNIS-1 Turkish

Code Page 853

INFO Turkish

Win. CP 1254

Code Page 857

Azeri

Block-set 10cpi*

Italics Set

Scanblock 10cpi

PGL Thai Set

Standard

Sets

(see page 178)

UTF-8

* = Factory Default

178

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Standard

Sets*

IBM PC* Multinational ECMA Latin 1

Primary Subset

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Latin American

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin Am II

Extended Subset

Code Page 437*

Code Page 850

ASCII (USA)*

EBCDIC

Primary Subset

ASCII (USA)*

German

Swedish

Danish

Norwegian

Finnish

English

Dutch

French

Spanish

Italian

Turkish

Japanese

Extended Subset

Multinational*

Barcode 10 cpi

Mult. DP 10 cpi

Mult. DP 12 cpi

Mult. LQ 10 cpi

Greek DP 10 cpi

Greek DP 12 cpi

Greek LQ 10 cpi

Grap. DP 10 cpi

Grap. LQ 10 cpi

Sci. DP 10 cpi

Sci. DP 12 cpi

Sci. LQ 10 cpi

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Norw./Danish

Swedish

Italian

Spanish

Japanese

French Canadian

Dutch

Finnish

Swiss

CP 858

EURO

Character Set

(Serial)

(from page 177)

DEC Mult.

Proprinter XL Emulation

179

Proprinter XL Emulation

Define CR Code

This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage

Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each

time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed

code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host

computer sends line feeds to the printer.

•

CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage

return.

•

CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.

Auto LF

This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the

forms width setting.

•

Enable (default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed

when data is received past the forms width.

•

Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Define LF Code

•

LF = LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a

Line Feed command is received. The next print position will be the current

print position of the next line.

•

LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed

command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next

line.

FF Valid at TOF

•

Enable (default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed

command and the printer is at the top of form.

•

Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed

command and the printer is at the top of form.

Printer

Protocol

(from page 158)

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Define LF

Code

FF valid at

TOF

Character

Set

Alt. Char

Set

20 CPI

Condensed

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Enable*

Disable

LF = LF*

LF = CR + LF

Enable*

Disable

(see page 181) Set 1*

Set 2

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

Proprinter

180

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Character Set

Specifies a character set as shown in the

Προπριντερ ΞΛ Χηαραχτερ

Σετσ Μενυ ον παγε 181

. To use one of these sets, choose the desired

group heading (such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the

desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the

group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8

selection allows printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are

shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

Alt. Char Set

This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should

be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character.

•

Set 1 (default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a

control code.

•

Set 2. Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03, 04, 05, 06, 15,

and 80 through 9F.

20 CPI Condensed

Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.

This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount

of information on a page.

•

Enable (default). Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal

characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer.

•

Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is

chosen by the host.

Proprinter XL Emulation

181

Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu

DEC 256 Greek*

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 851

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

Win. CP 1253

Greek 813 EURO

Greek 869 EURO

Character Set

(from page 179)

Standard

Sets*

Arabic

Sets

Cyrillic

Sets

European

Sets

Greek

Sets

Hebrew

Sets

Code Page

437*

Code Page

850

OCR-A OCR-B

ASMO 449*

ASMO 449+

ASMO 708

ASMO 708+

MS DOS CP710

MS DOS CP720

Sakr CP714

Aptec CP715

CP 786

Arabic CP 864

Arabic CP 1046

Arabic Lam 1

Arabic Lam 2

Win. CP 1256

Farsi 1

Farsi 2

1098 Farsi 1285

Cyrillic 866*

Cyrillic CP 437

Cyrillic 113

Cyrillic 8859-5

ISO 915

Code Page 855

7-bit Cyrillic

Ukrainian

Bulgarian

Win. CP 1251

Latvian 866

CP 1048

Latin 2 8859-2*

Latin 2 852

Mazovia

Kamenicky

Roman 8

PC-437 Slavic

Slavic 1250

Code Page 865

Code Page 860

Latin 1 8859-1

Latin 5 8859-9

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Win. CP 1250

Win. CP 1252

Win. CP 1257

CP 858 EURO

Lith. CP 773

Serbo Croatic 1

Serbo Croatic 2

CP 774

CP 775

ISO 8859-4

Hebrew Old*

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

Latin-1 Hebrew

Win. CP 1255

Multinational

ASCII (USA)*

EBCDIC

CP 858 EURO

Turkish

Sets

Data Gen. Turk.*

DEC Turkish

IBM Turkish

Siemens Turkish

PTT Turkish

IBC Turkish

Bull Turkish

AS400 Turkish

Unisys Turkish

NCR Turkish

PST Turkish

UNIS-1 Turkish

Code Page 853

INFO Turkish

Win. CP 1254

Code Page 857

Azeri

Misc.

Sets

Block-set 10cpi*

Italics Set

Scanblock 10cpi

PGL Thai Set

UTF-8

* = Factory Default

182

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu (with PCL-II)

Proprinter XL Character Sets Menu (with LG)

Character Set

(from page 179)

Code Page 437*

Code Page 850

OCR-A

OCR-B

Latin 2 8859-2

Latin 2 852

Bulgarian

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Multinational

DEC 256 Greek

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

PC851 LtGk [12G]

Greek-7 [12N]

Greek-8 [8G]

Hebrew Old

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

* = Factory Default

Character Set

(from page 179)

Code Page 437*

Code Page 850

OCR-A

OCR-B

Code Page 210

Code Page 220

Code Page 852

Code Page 855

Code Page 857

Code Page 862

Code Page 866

Lithuanian 1

Lithuanian 2

Hebrew New

Hebrew Dec

Hebrew Old

Latin 9 8859-15

CP 858 Euro

* = Factory Default

Epson FX Emulation

183

Epson FX Emulation

Define CR Code

The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives

a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is

enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an

additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this

feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.

•

CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage

return.

•

CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.

Auto LF

This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the

forms width setting.

•

Enable (default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed

when data is received past the forms width.

•

Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.

Define LF Code

The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a

Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,

each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage

Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host

computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.

•

LF = LF (default). Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.

•

LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed.

Printer

Protocol

(from page 158)

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Define LF

Code

Printer

Select

Character

Set

20 CPI

Condensed

Alt. Set

80-9F

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Enable*

Disable

LF = LF*

LF = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

(see page 185) Enable*

Disable

Control Code*

Printable

* = Factory Default

Epson FX

184

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Printer Select

•

Disable (default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.

•

Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and

enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.

Character Set

This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in

the

Επσον ΦΞ Χηαραχτερ Σετ Μενυ ον παγε 185

NOTE: When OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font

Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu (page 157)

is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.

To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as

European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that

group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired

set will be starred to indicate your selection. The UTF-8 selection allows

printing of UTF-8 encoded Unicode ™. Character sets are shown in detail in

the Character Sets Reference Manual.

20 CPI Condensed

Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set.

This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount

of information on a page.

•

Enable (default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal

characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For

example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI.

•

Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is

chosen by the host.

Alt. Set 80-9F

•

Control Code (default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through

hex 9F as a control code.

•

Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.

Epson FX Emulation

185

Epson FX Character Set Menu

Epson Set*

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Danish I

Swedish

Italian

Spanish I

Japanese

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin Am I

French Canadian

Latin Am II

OCR-A

OCR-B

Multinational

ASCII (USA)*

EBCDIC

Code Page 850

CP 858 EURO

IBM PC

DEC 256 Greek*

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 851

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

Win. CP 1253

Greek 813 EURO

Greek 869 EURO

Character Set

(from page 183)

Standard

Sets*

Arabic

Sets

Cyrillic

Sets

European

Sets

Greek

Sets

Hebrew

Sets

Turkish

Sets

Misc.

Sets

ASMO 449*

ASMO 449+

ASMO 708

ASMO 708+

MS DOS CP710

MS DOS CP720

Sakr CP714

Aptec CP715

CP 786

Arabic CP 864

Arabic CP 1046

Arabic Lam 1

Arabic Lam 2

Win. CP 1256

Farsi 1

Farsi 2

1098 Farsi 1285

Cyrillic 866*

Cyrillic CP 437

Cyrillic 113

Cyrillic 8859-5

ISO 915

Code Page 855

7-bit Cyrillic

Ukrainian

Bulgarian

Win. CP 1251

Latvian 866

CP 1048

Latin 2 8859-2*

Latin 2 852

Mazovia

Kamenicky

Roman 8

PC-437 Slavic

Slavic 1250

Code Page 865

Code Page 860

Latin 1 8859-1

Latin 5 8859-9

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Win. CP 1250

Win. CP 1252

Win. CP 1257

CP 858 EURO

Lith. CP 773

Serbo Croatic 1

Serbo Croatic 2

CP 774

CP 775

ISO 8859-4

Hebrew Old*

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

Latin-1 Hebrew

Win. CP 1255

Data Gen. Turk.*

DEC Turkish

IBM Turkish

Siemens Turkish

PTT Turkish

IBC Turkish

Bull Turkish

AS400 Turkish

Unisys Turkish

NCR Turkish

PST Turkish

UNIS-1 Turkish

Code Page 853

INFO Turkish

Win. CP 1254

Code Page 857

Azeri

Block-set 10cpi*

Italics Set

Scanblock 10cpi

PGL Thai Set

UTF-8

* = Factory Default

186

Chapter 4

LinePrinter Plus Emulation (With PCL-II)

Epson FX Character Set Menu (with PCL-II)

Character Set

(from page 183)

* Factory Default

Epson Set*

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Danish I

Swedish

Italian

Spanish I

Japanese

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin Am I

French Canadian

Latin Am II

OCR-A

OCR-B

Latin 8859-2

Latin 2 852

Cyrillic 866

Bulgarian

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Multinational

ASCII (USA)*

EBCDIC

DEC 256 Greek

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

PC851 LtGk [12G]

Greek-7 [12N]

Greek-8 [8G]

Hebrew Old

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

IBM PC

Epson FX Emulation

187

Epson FX Character Set Menu (with LG)

Character Set

(from page 183)

* Factory Default

Epson Set*

ASCII (USA)*

French

German

English

Danish I

Swedish

Italian

Spanish I

Japanese

Norwegian

Danish II

Spanish II

Latin Am I

French Canadian

Latin Am II

OCR-A

OCR-B

Code Page 210

Code Page 220

Code Page 852

Code Page 855

Code Page 857

Code Page 862

Code Page 866

Lithuanian 1

Lithuanian 2

Hebrew Old

Hebrew New

Hebrew Dec

Latin 9 8859-15

CP 858 Euro

IBM PC

188

Chapter 4

ANSI Emulation

EMULATION

(from page 123)

CPI/LPI

Select

Font

Attributes

Page

Format

Define CR

Code

Auto LF Define LF

Code

Select CPI

10.0* CPI

12.0 CPI

13.3. CPI

15.0 CPI

16.7 CPI

17.1 CPI

Select LPI

6.0* LPI

8.0 LPI

3.0 LPI

4.0 LPI

(see page 189) (see page 189) CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

LF = CR + LF*

LF = LF

* Factory Default

44/48XX-

ANSI

Pos. on

BC/OvrSz

BC Check

Digit

Barcode

darkmode

PUM

Default

Set to top*

Set to bottom

By host*

By printer

Enable*

Disable

Decipoints*

Lines/columns

Truncate PI

Slew

Truncate at TOF*

Disable

Character

Set

(see page 189)

Printer

Select

ON=DC1/

OFF=DC3*

Disable

ESC c

Sequence

Enable*

Disable

Reset Cmd

CFG Ld

Disable*

Power up config.

Current config

Factory config

Received

Observe*

Ignore

Received

DEL

Observe*

Ignore

Private

Mode

Set 2*

Set 1

ETX/ACK

Disable*

Immediate

After Print

189

Font Attributes

(from page 188)

Typeface Prop.

Spacing

Bold Print Slashed

Zero

Data Processing*

Gothic NLQ

Char. Graphics

High Speed

Italics NLQ

Courier NLQ

OCR-A

OCR-B

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

* = Factory Default

Page Format

(from page 188)

Margins Form

Length

Form Width

Left Margin

0 columns*

(0-369)

Right Margin

0 columns*

(0-369)

Top Margin

0 lines*

(0-451)

Bottom Margin

0 lines*

(0-451)

Funct. of lines

66 lines*

(1-192)

Function of CPI

136 Characters*

(1-272)

Character Set

(from page 188)

Latin 1 8859-1*

Cyrillic 8859-5

IBM PC-2 CP 437

IBM PC-2 CP 850

Slavic CP 852

Cyrillic CP 855

Fr. Can. CP 863

Russian CP 866

Greek CP 851

Turkish CP 853

Portug. CP 860

Arabic CP 864

Nordic CP 865

Latin 2 8859-2

Latin 3 8859-3

Latin 4 8859-4

Lat. Ara. 8859-6

Lat. Gre. 8859-7

Lat. Heb. 8859-8

Latin 5 8859-9

Turkish2 CP 867

Pol. Maz. CP 8576

Turkish CP 8577

Greek CP 8573

Italian CP 23

Spanish CP 24

Latin 9 8859-15

DEC 256 Greek

Turkish CP 857

USA

German

French A

French B

French Canadian

Dutch Netherlds

Italian

United Kingdom

Spanish

Danish/Norw. A

Danish/Norw. B

Danish/Norw. C

Danish/Norw. D

Swed./Finnish A

Swed./Finnish B

Swed./Finnish C

Swed./Finnish D

Swiss

USA

Yugoslavian

United Kingdm A

Turkish

Greek

DEC Mult.

Roman 8

ANSI Emulation

190

Chapter 4

ANSI Emulation

CPI/LPI Select

Defines the default values for the horizontal and vertical character spacing.

The number of characters per inch can range from 10.0 through 17.1. The

number of lines per inch can range from 3.0 through 8.0.

Font Attributes

Typeface

Choose a typeface from the available options.

Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing)

Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the

character cell includes the character and the space around the character.

•

Disable (default). Each character cell is printed with the same width.

Each column in the printed text will line up.

•

Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the

character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using

proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed

documents, giving text a typeset appearance.

Bold Print

•

Disable (default). Text is printed normally.

•

Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.

Slashed Zero

This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.

This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.

•

Disable (default). Zero is printed without a slash.

•

Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

191

Page Format

Margins

•

Left Margin. Defines where the first print column is located. The left

margin is specified as the number of characters from the left edge of the

form.

•

Right Margin. Defines where the last print column is located. The right

margin is specified as the number of characters from the right edge of the

form.

•

Top Margin. Defines the location of the first print line on the page. The

top margin is specified as the number of lines from the top of the form's

position.

•

Bottom Margin. Defines the location of the last print line on the page.

The bottom margin is specified as the number of lines from the bottom of

the form's position.

Form Length

Specifies the form length in lines. The maximum form length in lines depends

on the current LPI setting; it is equal to the maximum form length in inches

multiplied by the current LPI setting. For example, at 6 LPI the maximum form

length is 6 LPI x 24 inches = 144 lines.

Only valid form length values will be accepted. If you select a length that is

larger than the maximum length for the current LPI, the maximum length will

be used. If you need a longer page length, you must first change the LPI.

IMPORTANT

If the form length is set in lines and you change the LPI, the effective

page length changes to the form length in characters divided by the new

LPI.

NOTE: Receipt of a data stream control code which changes the form length

overrides the form length previously specified via the operator panel.

Form Width

Allows you to input the form width in characters from 1 through 272. The

maximum form width in characters depends on the current CPI setting; it is

equal to the maximum form width in inches multiplied by the current CPI

setting.

Only valid form width values will be accepted. If a width is selected that is

larger than the maximum width for the current CPI, then the maximum width

will be used. If a larger width value is desired, then the CPI value must be

changed first.

ANSI Emulation

192

Chapter 4

ANSI Emulation

Table 8 lists the maximum number of characters that can be printed for a

given Characters Per Inch (CPI) setting.

IMPORTANT

If the form width is set in characters and the CPI is changed, the

effective page width is changed to be equal to the form width in

characters divided by the new CPI.

Define CR Code

The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives

a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is

enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an

additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this

feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer.

•

CR = CR (default). No extra line feeds are inserted.

•

CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return.

Auto LF

Defines the printer actions when print data is received past the form width

setting.

•

Disable (default). Discards any data past the form width.

•

Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is

received past the form width.

Define LF Code

Controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code (hex 0A)

from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer

receives a line feed, it inserts an additional carriage return code (hex 0D) into

the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is

required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer.

•

LF = CR + LF (default). Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed.

•

LF = LF. Does not add a carriage return with a line feed.

Table 8. Form Width

CPI Setting Maximum Form Width

(in characters)

10.0 136

12.0 163

13.3 181

15.0 204

16.7 227

17.1 272

193

Character Set

This parameter selects a character set for the ANSI emulation. Note that

when 0876 OCR-A or 0877 OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font

Attributes Typeface parameter is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.

Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.

Printer Select

•

ON = DC1/OFF = DC3 (default). Disables the printer when a DC1 control

code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is

received.

•

Disable. Ignores the DC1 and DC3 control codes.

ESC c Sequence

•

Enable (default). An ESC c code received from the host resets the printer

parameters to the factory defaults.

•

Disable. An ESC c code received from the host is ignored.

Reset Cmd CFG Ld

When the printer receives a host data stream reset command

(ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected

configuration will be loaded.

•

Disable (default). The active emulation parameters are loaded when the

reset command is executed.

•

Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset

command is executed.

•

Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the

reset command is executed.

•

Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the

reset command is executed.

Received CR

•

Observe (default). A CR code received from the host is handled as a

carriage return.

•

Ignore. A CR code received from the host is ignored.

Received DEL

•

Observe (default). A DEL code received from the host is handled as a

Delete command.

•

Ignore. A DEL code received from the host is ignored.

Private Mode

Determines the default type of character set (Set 1 or Set 2). This can also be

set by ESC sequences ESC [>5h and ESC [>5l. Refer to these descriptions in

the ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual for further details.

ANSI Emulation

194

Chapter 4

ANSI Emulation

Pos. on BC/OvrSz

•

Set to top (default). The paper is fed back to the top of barcodes or

oversized characters after they are printed. This allows printing on the

same line.

•

Set to bottom. The printer will continue printing without backing up.

BC Check Digit

•

By host (default). The host calculates the barcode check digit and sends

it along with the barcode. The check digit is not verified by the printer but

printed as it was received.

•

By printer. The barcode is sent without the check digit, and the printer

calculates and adds it in.

Barcode Darkmode

•

Enable (default). The barcodes are printed at a higher resolution.

•

Disable. The barcodes are printed at lower resolution but at a higher

speed.

PUM Default

This is the Unit of Measure (UOM) as it is used within the ANSI emulation.

Coordinates received in ESC sequences can be sent in two UOMs:

•

Decipoints (default). A unit of 1/720 inch

•

Lines or columns. Uses the current LPI and CPI values.

The UOM used is determined by this configuration setting.

Truncate PI Slew

•

Truncate at TOF (default). The slew is terminated when the next Top-of-

Form is reached. (This function applies to the ANSI EVFU only.)

•

Disable. PI slews will be completed independent of their length.

ETX/ACK

End of Text/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of communcation to the

printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text

(ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it acknowledges the

ETX, thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data.

•

Disable (default)

•

Immediate

•

Afterprint

Features

195

IGP/PGL Emulation

The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor

(IGP) for the line matrix family of printers. It is based upon, and is compatible

with, the IGP-100/200/400 board using the PGL. The IGP graphics

processing features are detailed below.

Features

On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels

with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP programs control all graphic

functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing

time.

Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with user-

selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms

and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.

Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered

when the form is created), be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a specific

location after the form is created), or can be dynamically merged with the

form.

Selectable Barcodes provide you with the appropriate barcode for your

application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of

barcodes is available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A

through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13,

POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and PDF417. UPC and EAN barcodes can

specify add-on data.

Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where

needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a

wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up

to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 10, 12, 13, 15, 17,

and 20 characters per inch (cpi) are available.

Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and

shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.

Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,

expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees

clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.

Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white

characters on a dark background.

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.

Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and

automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a

specified reference point.

Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to

retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical

density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.

Multinational Character Sets provide many international character sets,

each 96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own

character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.

196

Chapter 4

IGP/PGL Emulation

Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also

containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory.

Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel

You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by

control codes as explained in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual.

The PGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters

marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be

offline to enter the configuration structure.

Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another

level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely. Configure

the IGP/PGL according to your specific requirements.

IMPORTANT

BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/PGL, print a configuration sheet to see

all of the current settings.

IGP/PGL Submenu

197

IGP/PGL Submenu

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Define CR

Code

Define LF

Code

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

LF = LF*

LF = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

7E*

(1-255)

16*

Disable*

Enable

(see page 208)

Disable*

Enable

6.0*

8.0

9.0

10.0

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Light Font

Dark Font

Ignore Mode

Disable*

Enable

Select Char

(0-255)

None*

MVP

L150

P3000

P6000

P9000

IGP/PGL

Autowrap PGL

SFCC

PI Slew

Range

CR Edit Select

Font

Slash 0 Select LPI Auto

Uppercase

Skip Cmd

Prefix

Power On

IGP/PGL

Ext Execute

Copy

Disable*

Enable

Host Form

Length

Add Nothing*

Add; 0

Add; X

Var Form

Type

Compressed

CPI

Ignore

Char

Compatbl.

Mode

Disable*

Auto Eject

Auto TOF

Forms

Handling

Barcode

Options

(see page 202) 00.0 inches*

(.1 - 3.0 inches)

Var Form

Adjust

Expanded

Font

Scalable*

Block

Alt Block 1

Alt Block 2

Scalable

Size

Normal*

Block

True Form

Slew

Printer PI

Line

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

Data Processing*

High

Best

Quality

Power-on

S-Mode

(0 - 5)

On*

Debug Mode

Fault

Off

Error

Report

Trunc Dyn

Data

Disable*

Enable

198

Chapter 4

IGP/PGL Emulation

IGP/PGL Submenu (With PCL-II)

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Define CR

Code

Define LF

Code

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

LF = LF*

LF = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

7E* 16*

Disable*

Enable

1-33

6.0*

8.0

9.0

10.0

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Ignore Mode

Disable*

Enable

Select Char

(0-255)

Disable*

Enable

IGP/PGL

Autowrap PGL

SFCC

PI Slew

Range

CR Edit Select

Font

Select LPI Auto

Uppercase

Skip Cmd

Prefix

Power On

IGP/PGL

Ext Execute

Copy

Compressed

CPI

Ignore

Char

IGP100

Compatbl.

UPC

Descenders

Enable*

Disable

Optimized

Ratio

Disable*

Enable

Error

Report

On*

Debug Mode

Fault

Off

IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG)

199

IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG)

Define CR (Carriage Return) Code

This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into

the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used

only if the host computer does not send line feeds to the printer.

•

CR = CR (default). Does not perform a line feed. The next print position

will be print position 1 of the current line.

•

CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position

will be print position 1 of the next line.

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Define CR

Code

Define LF

Code

CR = CR*

CR = CR + LF

LF = LF*

LF = CR + LF

Disable*

Enable

7E* 16*

Disable*

Enable

1-34

6.0*

8.0

9.0

10.0

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Ignore Mode

Disable*

Enable

Select Char

(0-255)

Disable*

Enable

IGP/PGL

PGL

SFCC

PI Slew

Range

CR Edit Select Font

Select LPI Auto

Uppercase

Skip Cmd

Prefix

Power On

IGP/PGL

Ext Execute

Copy

Compressed

CPI

Ignore

Char

IGP100

Compatbl.

UPC

Descenders

Enable*

Disable

Optimized

Ratio

Disable*

Enable

Autowrap

200

Chapter 4

IGP/PGL Emulation

Define LF (Line Feed) Code

This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code

into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in

most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send

carriage returns to the printer.

•

LF = LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The

next print position will be the current print position of the next line.

•

LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print

position will be print position 1 of the next line.

Autowrap

This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of

text exceeds the right margin.

•

Disable (default). Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or

CR + LF is received.

•

Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.

PGL SFCC

You can specify which hex code (1-255) will be used as the Special Function

Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC denotes

that the following data is a PGL command.

PI Slew Range

You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.

•

16 (default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.

•

15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move

1 line.

CR Edit

This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.

•

Disable (default). The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not

followed by line feeds.

•

Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are

not followed by line feeds.

Select Font

Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the

PGL. Refer to

ΙΓΠ/ΠΓΛ Φοντ Σετ Μενυ ον παγε 208

. for available

selections.

201

Slash 0

This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.

This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B.

•

Disable (default). Zero is printed without a slash.

•

Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

Select LPI

This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For

example, at 6 lpi there is

1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line. The

options are:

•

6.0 (default)

•

8.0

•

9.0

•

10.0

Auto Uppercase

This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using

the ALPHA command.

•

Disable (default). The printer will print text in upper and lowercase.

•

Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.

Skip Cmd Prefix

This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL

command is received.

•

Enable (default). The printer ignores all data on the current line before an

IGP command.

•

Disable. The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP

command.

Forms Handling

This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways:

•

Disable (default). No effect.

•

Auto Eject. Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out

the last page.

•

Auto TOF. Automatically does a form feed (FF) at the end of each form to

the next top of form.

202

Chapter 4

IGP/PGL Emulation

Power On IGP/PGL

You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer

is powered on.

•

Enable (default). The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on.

(The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)

•

Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL

feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)

Ext Execute Copy

•

Disable (default). Dynamic data and overlay data are not allowed if the

optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as

part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100 compatible.)

•

Enable. Only dynamic data is allowed within a form in which the Form

Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this case, the

exact same form (with identical dynamic data, etc.) is printed for the Form

Count. However, incremental data is not incremented since the page that

is printing is exactly the same. Also, each form is printed on a separate

page.

Barcode Options

The following sub-options help define specific options regarding barcode

printing.

UPC Descenders

This parameter allows you to print barcode descenders when human

readable data is not present in the UPC/EAN barcodes.

•

Always (default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders, even

if there is no human readable data.

•

Never. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no

human readable data.

•

Only with PDF. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders only

when the PDF command is present.

Barcode

Options

(from page 197)

UPC

Descenders

Optimized

Ratio

I-2/5

Selection

AI 00

Spaces

Select SO

Char

Always*

Never

Only with PDF

Disable*

Enable

Leading Zero*

Trailing Space

X2 DPD

Modulo 7 CD

Disable*

Enable

14*

(0-255)

* = Factory Default

User-Def

Ratio

Enable*

Disable

C39

Compatbl.

Disable*

Enable

203

Optimized Ratio

This option selects different barcode ratios for certain barcodes including

Code 39 and I-2/5. It is included for compatibility with the IGP-X00 printers.

•

Disable (default). Use standard barcode ratios.

•

Enable. Select the alternate barcode ratios.

I-2/5 Selection

This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization.

Usually, if I-2/5 barcodes have an odd number of digits, a leading zero is

inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00 customization

gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the barcode

instead.

•

Leading Zero (default). A leading zero is inserted in front of the printable

data field.

•

Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the printable data field

and a zero is encoded with the corresponding space in the end of the

barcode.

•

X2 DPD. When selected, an I-2/5 barcode with an X2 magnification will

use the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for

compatibility issues.

•

Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 barcode uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of

the default modulo 10 check digit.

AI 00 Spaces

This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application

identifier (AI) is 00.

•

Disable (default). The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed

in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.

•

Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated

by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.

Select SO Char

Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place

of SO (Shift Out) as the control code. This allows access for the alternate set

of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes

in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.

User-Def Ratio

•

Enable (default). User-defined ratios are accepted for barcodes.

•

Disable. User-defined ratios are ignored and the magnification X1 is used

in its place.

204

Chapter 4

IGP/PGL Emulation

C39 Compatbl.

This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set

compatible with the new.

•

Disable (default) Uses the current way of decoding.

•

Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.

Host Form Length

Determines whether the form length specified in the CREATE command

changes the form length designated in the LP+ menu (see

ΛινεΠριντερ

Πλυσ Εμυλατιον ον παγε 157

) when the form is printed by the

EXECUTE command.

•

Disable (default). The LP+ form length is unaffected by the form being

printed.

•

Enable. The LP+ form length changes to match the length of the PGL

form being printed.

Var Form Adjust

(Ranges from 0 - 30). Default is 0. This menu value is tenths of inches. The

value of this menu specifies the amount of distance to add to PGL forms that

have variable form lengths. Variable length forms are forms that are defined

by using a “;0” in the CREATE statement: ~CREATE;FORM;0. Variable form

lengths are defined by the contents within the form - the form is only as long

as necessary to print the form. Changing this menu value adds additional

lengths to the form (in tenths of inches). Again, this only applies to forms that

use the “;0” variable length forms.

Var Form Type

This menu option applies only to the host command, CREATE;NAME or

CREATE;NAME;DISK. The host command CREATE;NAME followed by ;0, ;X

or a form length number will always override the menu option.

•

Add Nothing (default). No action.

•

Add; 0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed

element. Same as CREATE;NAME;0.

•

Add; X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page

length.

Compressed CPI

This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character (60% shorter)

for 17 or 20 cpi instead of the normal height character.

•

Disable (default). The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 cpi font.

•

Light Font. Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 cpi font.

•

Dark Font. Uses a darker compressed 17 or 20 cpi font compatible with

the IGP-X00 printers.

205

Ignore Char

•

Ignore Mode

This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under

the Select Character menu.

•

Disable (default). The PGL does not ignore any characters.

•

Enable. The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select

Character menu.

•

Select Char

Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the

host.

Compatbl. Mode

This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP

with respect to certain commands.

All new users with new applications should select the “None” option. Selecting

this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual.

When replacing an older product operating with an existing application,

especially those using the PMODE and SMODE commands, you may need to

select a compatibility mode. In this case, select the printer model number

option that most closely matches the printer being replaced. The Compatibility

Mode options include:

•

None (default)

•

MVP

•

L150

•

P3000

•

P6000

•

P9000

Expanded Font

This option defines the type of expanded characters the PGL will select:

•

Scalable (default). These expanded characters have rounded edges.

•

Block. These are block characters compatible with the

IGP-X00 printers.

•

Alt Block 1 / Alt Block 2. Reserved block sets used only for compatibility

purposes.

Scalable Size

•

Normal (default). Controls the size of scalable characters to be either

normal size (as set by the user) or adjusted to match the size of block

fonts.

•

Block. Adjusts the size of scalable characters to exactly match its block

font alternative.

206

Chapter 4

IGP/PGL Emulation

True Form Slew

This option is related to slewing within forms when using the PMODE

command. Customers with new applications are advised to keep this option

enabled.

•

Enable (default). Form length is accurate according to the form length

parameter in the CREATE command.

•

Disable. Form length is IGP-X00 compatible when using PMODE.

Printer PI Line

This option enables the IGP to send PI instructions to the printer to slew the

form.

•

Enable (default). Send the PI instructions to the printer (LinePrinter Plus)

during form slew. This is IGP-X00 compatible.

•

Disable. Do not send PI instructions to the printer. LFs are sent instead.

Print Quality

•

Data Processing (default). The emulation prints at 60 x 72 dpi and lets

you choose between normal alphanumerics and barcodes and dark mode

alphanumerics and barcodes. This mode should be set if you want the

highest speed.

•

High. The emulation prints at 120 x 72 dpi, but all alphanumerics and

barcodes are automatically printed in dark mode.

•

Best. The emulation prints at 120 x 144 dpi and dark mode, which

produces a higher resolution, better-looking print image.

Power-on S-Mode

This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP

with respect to certain commands.

All new users with new applications should select “0,” the default option.

Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this

manual.

Power on S-Mode sets the printer in an SMODE compatibility state at power-

up. The default is 0 (disabled, no power-on mode). To use this feature, select

a mode from 1 through 5, which puts IGP/PGL in an SMODE state according

to the compatibility mode set. If the compatibility mode set is None, then MVP

is assumed by default.

For more information, see the IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.

207

Trunc Dyn Data

This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the

maximum data length specified in Create Mode.

•

Disable (default). If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length,

an error will report.

•

Enable. If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, the data

truncates.

Error Report

Sets the error reporting capability for IGP/PGL forms.

•

On (default). Form boundary error checking reported. Any element which

falls off the current page is reported as an error.

•

Debug Mode. The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is

defined in Create Form mode. Each line of the Create Form is printed

along with an error if one occurred. This is the same functionality as if

there were a slash (/) entered before the Create Form Name.

•

Fault. When an error occurs, the error is printed and the message “IGP/

PGL ERROR” appears on the printer front panel. The printer then stops

printing and goes offline. The error must be cleared before the printer can

resume normal operation.

•

Off. No form boundary checking. Graphic elements appear clipped if they

are beyond the page boundaries.

Select Font

Allows you to choose from various character sets, including IGP/PGL

Standard sets, 256 character multinational sets, and UTF-8 encoded

Unicode™.

208

Chapter 4

IGP/PGL Emulation

IGP/PGL Font Set Menu

Select Font

(from page 197)

Standard

Sets*

Arabic

Sets

Cyrillic

Sets

European

Sets

Greek

Sets

Hebrew

Sets

Turkish

Sets

Misc.

Sets

0) ASCII*

1) German

2) Swedish

3) Danish

4) Norwegian

5) Finnish

6) English

7) Dutch

8) French

9) Spanish

10) Italian

11) Turkish

12) CP 437

13) CP 850

14-15) Reserved

16-23) Dwn Overlay

24-31) User Def.

ASMO 449*

ASMO 449+

ASMO 708

ASMO 708+

MS DOS CP710

MS DOS CP720

Sakr CP714

Aptec CP715

CP 786

Arabic CP 864

Arabic CP 1046

Arabic Lam 1

Arabic Lam 2

Win. CP 1256

Farsi 1

Farsi 2

1098 Farsi 1285

Code Page 866*

Cyrillic CP 437

Cyrillic 113

Cyrillic 8859-5

ISO 915

Code Page 855

7-bit Cyrillic

Ukrainian

Bulgarian

Win. CP 1251

Latvian 866

CP 1048

Latin 2 8859-2*

Latin 2 852

Mazovia

Kamenicky

Roman 8

PC-437 Slavic

Slavic 1250

Code Page 865

Code Page 860

Latin 1 8859-1

Latin 5 8859-9

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Win. CP 1250

Win. CP 1252

Win. CP 1257

CP 858 EURO

Lith. CP 773

Serbo Croatic 1

Serbo Croatic 2

CP 774

CP 775

ISO 8859-4

DEC 256 Greek*

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 851

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

Win. CP 1253

Greek 813 EURO

Greek 869 EURO

Hebrew Old*

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

Latin-1 Hebrew

Win. CP 1255

Data Gen. Turk.*

DEC Turkish

IBM Turkish

Siemens Turkish

PTT Turkish

IBC Turkish

Bull Turkish

AS400 Turkish

Unisys Turkish

NCR Turkish

PST Turkish

UNIS-1 Turkish

Code Page 853

INFO Turkish

Win. CP 1254

Code Page 857

Azeri

Block-set 10cpi*

Italics Set

Scanblock 10cpi

PGL Thai Set

* = Factory Default

UTF-8

Features

209

IGP/VGL Emulation

Code V Graphics language (VGL) is an Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP)

software emulation designed for your Line Matrix printer. The IGP Code V

emulation of the QMS

Code V Version II programming language produces

online forms, barcodes, and alphanumeric text-generation. The graphics

processing features are detailed below.

Features

OnLine Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels

with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all

graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and

processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal,

solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness, logos, and special

alphanumeric print features.

Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print with

standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations. Available

barcodes are Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and

C, and Code EAN/UCC 128, EAN 8, EAN 13, Interleaved 2 of 5, MSI, UPC-A,

UPC-E, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and UPC Shipping. POSTNET is

available only in the horizontal direction. A dark print mode is included for

darker, high-contrast barcodes. The IBARC barcode command prints

barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90, rotated 180, or rotated

270 degrees.

Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.

Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous

range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Several compressed

print sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, and 20 (cpi), permitting up to

170 columns in an 8.5 inch printed area (20 cpi).

Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,

expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees

clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.

Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of

print and shading features, which provides a “customized” appearance for

forms, reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV

, GS-

Mark, UL

, and CSA

symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL,

and you can also define custom symbols.

Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing

white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded

background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing

may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs.

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.

Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and

automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a

specified reference point.

Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets.

Based on the Multinational Character Set, you can create your own character

sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory.

210

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel

You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by

control codes as explained in the IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual.

The VGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters

marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be

offline to enter the configuration structure.

IMPORTANT

BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/VGL, print a configuration sheet to see

all of the current settings.

Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another

level in the configuration menu or exit the menu completely.

IGP/VGL Submenu

EMULATION

(from page 123)

SFCC &

Pwrup

LPI Graphics

Options

Error

Handling

Ignore/DB8

Setup

Font Set PI Control Prt to

Emulate

VGL SFCC

5E*

Power-up ^X

Disable*

Enable

Power-up ^F

Disable*

Enable

Power-up ^PY

Disable*

Enable

(see page 211) Error Msgs

Enable*

Disable

Error Markers

Enable*

Disable

Offpage Errors

Disable*

Enable

Barcode Errors

Enable*

Disable

Ignore Chars

Disable*

Char 1

Char 2

Char 1&2

Ignore Ch#1

0* (0-255)

Ignore Ch#2

0* (0-255)

Data Bit 8

Enable*

Disable

(see page 224) Printer PI

Disable*

Enable

Host PI

Disable*

Enable

Max PI 16

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

MVP/MVP 150B

L150

P3040

P6000

P9000

* = Factory Default

IGP/VGL

IGP/VGL Submenu

211

IGP/VGL Graphics Options Submenu

Graphics

Options

(from page 210)

Slash 0 Ignore Dots Append

Rotated

Truncate

Alpha

True Vert

1/10

Absorb After

^PY

UPC

Descenders

Rot. Char

Size

Ignore

Spaces

Midline PY Print

Quality

Expanded

Font

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

Enable

Absorb Motion*

Absorb All

Disable

Enable*

Disable

Adjusted*

Not Adjusted

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Data Processing*

High

Scalable*

Block

* = Factory Default

LP+ Font MSI Check

Digit

Width Limit Absorb After

^PN

IGP110

Compatbl.

Disable*

Enable

Print*

Don’t Print

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

I25

Selection

I25 Odd Data*

Leading Zero

Check Digit

Convert Alpha

Disable*

Enable

Auto FF

at ^PN

Disable*

Enable

Ignore ^Lxx

Cmd.

Disable*

Enable

AI 00

Spaces

Disable*

Enable

PDF Size

Comp.

Disable*

Enable

C128 Mode

Comp

Disable*

Enable

C39

Compatbl.

Disable*

Enable

212

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

IGP/VGL Submenu (with PCL-II)

EMULATION

(from page 123)

SFCC &

Pwrup

LPI Graphics

Options

Error

Handling

Ignore/DB8

Setup

ISO

Char Set

PI Control

Control Char

5E*

Ignore Mode

Disable*

Enable

Free Format

Disable*

Enable

Mgnum Conversion

Disable*

Enable

(see page 213) Error Msgs

Enable*

Disable

Error Markers

Enable*

Disable

Offpage Errors

Disable*

Enable

Barcode Errors

Enable*

Disable

Ignore Nulls

Disable*

Enable

Data Bit 8

Enable*

Disable

1-33

Printer PI

Disable*

Enable

Host PI

Disable*

Enable

Max PI 16

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

IGP/VGL

IGP/VGL Submenu (with PCL-II)

213

IGP/VGL (with PCL-II) Graphics Options

Graphics

Options

(from page 212)

Slashes in

Zeros

Ignore Dots Append

Rotated

Truncate

Alpha

True Vert

1/10

UPC

Descenders

Rot. Char

Size

Ignore

Spaces

Midline PY Convert

to U/C

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Adjusted*

Not Adjusted

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

* = Factory Default

Absorb After

^PN

Disable*

Enable

Absorb After

^PY

Absorb All*

Disable

Absorb Motion

IGP110

Compatbl.

Disable*

Enable

214

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG)

EMULATION

(from page 123)

SFCC &

Pwrup

LPI Graphics

Options

Error

Handling

Ignore/DB8

Setup

Font Set PCI Control

VGL SFCC

5E*

Power-Up ^X

Disable*

Enable

Power-Up ^F

Disable*

Enable

Power-Up ^ PY

Disable*

Enable

(see page 215) Error Msgs

Enable*

Disable

Error Markers

Enable*

Disable

Offpage Errors

Disable*

Enable

Barcode Errors

Enable*

Disable

Ignore Chars

Disable

Char 1

Char 2

Char 1 & 2

Ignore Ch #1

1 - 255

Ignore Ch #2

1 - 255

Data Bit 8

Enable*

Disable

1-33

Printer PI

Disable*

Enable

Host PI

Disable*

Enable

Max PI 16

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

IGP/VGL

IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG)

215

IGP/VGL (with LG) Graphics Options

SFCC & Pwrup

This option has several sub-options which define the SFCC and power-up

configuration used with VGL.

VGL SFCC

This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value 5E.

Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected VGL SFCC.

Power Up ^X

•

Disable (default).

•

Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default and selects the

graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored

until a ^A command is received.

Power Up ^F

•

Disable (default).

•

Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default and selects the

graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the VGL

to ignore carriage returns, line feeds, and all characters below hex 20

sent from the host.

Graphics

Options

(from page 214)

Slash 0 Ignore Dots Append

Rotated

Truncate

Alpha

True Vert

1/10

UPC

Descenders

Rot. Char

Size

Ignore

Spaces

Midline PY

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Adjusted*

Not Adjusted

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

* = Factory Default

Absorb After

^PN

IGP110

Compatbl.

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

Absorb After

^PY

Absorb Motion*

Absorb All

Disable

Dark

Barcode

Disable*

Enable

Width Limit

Disable*

Enable

216

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

Power Up ^PY

•

Disable (default).

•

Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.

LPI

The number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6

inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.

Graphics Options

The following are several options which configure printing output.

Slash 0

This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.

This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.

•

Disable (default). Zero is printed without a slash.

•

Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.

Ignore Dots

•

Disable (default).

•

Enable. Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only

1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as text.

Append Rotated

•

Disable (default). Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as

separate elements.

•

Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise,

counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.

Truncate Alpha

When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off

Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right

side of the form. The options include:

•

Enable (default)

•

Disable

True Vert 1/10

•

Disable (default). A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as 7/72 of

an inch. The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected. For

example, a one-inch move would be 70/72 of an inch. Vertical moves that

have the same value are identical in length.

•

Enable. A vertical 1/10 inch parameter is used as 1/10 inch. Rounding

occurs to the nearest 1/72 inch. This can cause vertical moves that have

the same value to differ by

1/72 inch.

217

Absorb After ^PY

•

Absorb Motion (default). The first paper motion following a ^PY

command is ignored.

•

Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host

generated motion terminator is detected.

•

Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to

the printer and result in paper motion.

UPC Descenders

•

Enable (default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders, even

if there is no human readable data.

•

Disable. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no

human readable data.

Rot. Char Size

•

Adjusted (default). Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise), expanded

characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the

same size parameters.

•

Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters are the same size as

unrotated characters with the same size parameters.

Ignore Spaces

•

Disable (default). Trailing spaces are not deleted from the last

alphanumeric element in a graphics pass.

•

Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from the last alphanumeric element

in a graphics pass.

Midline PY (includes ^PN)

•

Disable (default). The Graphics mode Enable command, ^PY, must be

the first three characters of a line.

•

Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.

Print Quality

•

Data Processing (default). ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in

normal mode at 60 x 72 dpi. This mode should be set if the highest speed

is desired.

•

High. ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in dark mode at

120 x 72 dpi.

Expanded Font

•

Scalable (default). These expanded characters have rounded edges.

•

Block. These are block characters compatible with IGP-X10 printers.

218

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

LP+ Font

•

Disable (default). The IGP/VGL uses its default half-dot font, which is

slightly different from the standard bitmap font used by LP+ at 12, 13, 15

and 17 cpi.

•

Enable. The IGP/VGL uses the same font as used by LP+ at all cpi.

MSI Check Digit

•

Print (default). The check digit is appended at the end of the printable

data field for MSI barcodes.

•

Don't Print. The check digit for MSI barcodes does not print.

I25 Selection

•

I25 Odd Data (default). When an odd number of data is provided, the

default setting, Leading Zero, will add a zero to the beginning of the bar

code data. The setting, Check Digit, will add a check digit to the end of the

bar code data so that the results add up to an even number of data.

•

Convert Alpha. Disable is the default. When enabled, each non-digit I25

bar code character will convert to “0.”

NOTE: If you use an Interleaved 2/5 barcode that automatically adds the

check digit (type code k or l, IBARC type code INT2/5CD or INT2/

5CDA), the check digit is added regardless of how this parameter is

set.

AI 00 Spaces

This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application

identifier (AI) is 00.

•

Disable (default). The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed

in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.

•

Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated

by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.

219

Width Limit

•

Disable (default).

•

Enable. The system will limit the length and width for expanded

characters to a limit shown in Table 9, which displays the maximum width

allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 (0.0 through 4.0

inches).

Absorb After ^PN

•

Disable (default). All line terminators that follow the ^PN command are

sent to the printer and processed.

•

Enable. The first motion line terminator that follows the ^PN command is

ignored.

IGP110 Compatbl.

This option instructs the VGL to behave similarly to the IGP-10 with respect to

certain commands. All new users with new applications should select the

“Disable” option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as

described in this manual.

•

Disable (default). The IGP does not emulate the IGP-10 mode.

•

Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-10 version.

Table 9. Width Limit Table

Height Param. Max. Width

Allowed Height Param. Max. Width

Allowed

00 99 21 51

01 99 22 53

02 323 56

03 624 58

04 825 61

05 11 26 63

06 13 27 66

07 16 28 68

08 18 29 71

09 21 30 73

10 23 31 76

11 26 32 78

12 28 33 81

13 31 34 83

14 33 35 86

15 36 36 88

16 38 37 91

17 41 38 93

18 43 39 96

19 46 40 98

20 48

220

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

Auto FF at ^PN

•

Disable (default). A form feed will not be generated automatically when

the ^PN command is encountered.

•

Enable. A form feed will be generated automatically to slew to the top of

the next form when the ^PN command is encountered and when the

current vertical position is not at top of form.

PDF Size Comp.

This option is for compatability of the font size of the barcode printable data

field on the old build.

•

Disable (default). Uses the normal font size.

•

Enable. Matches the font size of the old build.

C128 Mode Comp

The menu is for compatibility of the old build in auto mode switch.

•

Disable (default). Uses auto mode switch.

•

Enable. Matches the old build on the auto mode switch.

C39 Compatbl.

This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set

compatible with the new.

•

Disable (disable). Uses the current way of decoding.

•

Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.

Ignore ^Lxx Cmd.

•

Disable (default).

•

Enable. The ^Lxx command will always be ignored.

Error Handling

Following are several options which define how errors are reported.

Error Msgs

•

Enable (default). Command syntax is checked and error messages

printed when command parameters are incorrect.

•

Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.

221

Error Markers

•

Enable (default). Prints the following error markers for those elements

that print beyond the page boundaries:

>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;

<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page;

♦

for elements where the starting position of the command contains an

error other than an off-page error.

Offpage Errors

•

Disable (default). Does not report errors for elements that start or end

beyond the right edge of the page.

•

Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right

edge of the page.

Barcode Errors

•

Enable (default). An error message will print when invalid barcode data is

encountered.

•

Disable. VGL will not print an error for illegal barcode data; the barcode

will be skipped.

NOTE: When the Barcode Errors option is disabled, the VGL emulation will

try to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra

digits or adding zeros to the end of barcode data to meet minimum

data length requirements for some barcodes. Not all errors will be

corrected.

Ignore / DB8 Setup

Following are several options which define character filtering and Data Bit 8.

Ignore Chars

•

Disable (default). Character filtering is not enabled.

•

Char 1. Character 1 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#1” to

specify character 1.

•

Char 2. Character 2 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#2” to

specify character 2.

•

Char 1 & 2. Characters 1 & 2 will be filtered. Select the options “Ignore

CH#1” and “Ignore CH#2” to specify values for these characters.

Ignore CH#1

Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values

are from 0 through 255.

Ignore CH#2

Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values

are from 0 through 255.

222

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

Data Bit 8

•

Enable (default). The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all

8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can

be accessed.

•

Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, Data Bit 8 internally indicates

PI line status. To use the PI line, disable Data Bit 8, and enable the Host

PI configuration option (under the PI Control option, below).

NOTE: Data Bit 8 is interpreted as either Data Bit 8 or PI signal, but never

both. When enabled as Data Bit 8, Data Bit 8 has priority over the PI

signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data

and not to interpret PI line data.

Conversely, when Data Bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used,

Data Bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you

cannot access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to

access characters in the hex 80-FF range, Data Bit 8 must be

enabled.

Font Set

The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the

VGL. Refer to

ΙΓΠ/ςΓΛ Φοντ Σετ Μενυ ον παγε 224

for available

selections.

PI Control

Printer PI

•

Disable (default). The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line

disabled.

•

Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.

Host PI

•

Disable (default). The host does not send PI signals.

•

Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option

must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.

Max PI 16

•

Enable (default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.

•

Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will

always move 1 line.

223

Prt To Emulate

This option allows you to select an earlier model printer/IGP board

combination to emulate. When a printer emulation is selected, the scaling

command causes the printer to generate a graphic image in the same density

as the printer emulation chosen. Five types of printers can be emulated: MVP

or MVP 150B, L150, P3040, P6000, and P9000. Once a printer emulation is

selected, it remains active until the printer is turned off or another printer

emulation is selected. All new users with new applications should select the

“Disable” option, which insures the printer behaves as described in this

manual. The other compatibility modes are required to emulate the behaviors

of older printers which may be inconsistent with the documented VGL

functionality. Proper use of this feature requires the printer to be equipped

with high resolution hammer bank tips (12 mil).

224

Chapter 4

IGP/VGL Emulation

IGP/VGL Font Set Menu

Font Set

(from page 210)

Standard

Sets*

Arabic

Sets

Cyrillic

Sets

European

Sets

Greek

Sets

Hebrew

Sets

Turkish

Sets

Misc.

Sets

0) ASCII*

1) German

2) Swedish

3) Danish

4) Norwegian

5) Finnish

6) English

7) Dutch

8) French

9) Spanish

10) Italian

11) Turkish

12) CP 437

13) CP 850

ASMO 449*

ASMO 449+

ASMO 708

ASMO 708+

MS DOS CP710

MS DOS CP720

Sakr CP 714

Aptec CP715

CP 786

Arabic CP 864

Arabic CP 1046

Arabic Lam 1

Arabic Lam 2

Win. CP 1256

Farsi 1

Farsi 2

1098 Farsi 1285

Code Page 866*

Cyrillic CP 437

Cyrillic 113

Cyrillic 8859-5

ISO 915

Code Page 855

7-bit Cyrillic

Ukrainian

Bulgarian

Win. CP 1251

Latvian 866

CP 1048

Latin 2 8859-2*

Latin 2 852

Mazovia

Kamenicky

Roman 8

PC-437 Slavic

Slavic 1250

Code Page 865

Code Page 860

Latin 1 8859-1

Latin 5 8859-9

Latin 9 8859-15

Polish POL1

Win. CP 1250

Win. CP 1252

Win. CP 1257

CP 858 EURO

Lith. CP 773

Serbo Croatic 1

Serbo Croatic 2

CP 774

CP 775

ISO 8859-4

DEC 256 Greek*

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 851

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

Win. CP 1253

Greek 813 EURO

Greek 869 EURO

Hebrew Old*

Hebrew New

Hebrew DEC

Latin-1 Hebrew

Win. CP 1255

Data Gen. Turk.*

DEC Turkish

IBM Turkish

Siemens Turkish

PTT Turkish

IBC Turkish

Bull Turkish

AS400 Turkish

Unisys Turkish

NCR Turkish

PST Turkish

UNIS-1 Turkish

Code Page 853

INFO Turkish

Win. CP 1254

Code Page 857

Azeri

Block-set 10cpi*

Italics Set

Scanblock 10cpi

PGL Thai Set

* = Factory Default

225

IPDS Emulation

Font Size Graphics

Quality

Barcode

Quality

Barcode

Speed

Early Print

Comp

Graphics

Scaling

Graphic

Charsize

I2/5

Checksum

Select By Host*

Standard

Compressed

High*

Select By Host

Low

High*

Select By Host

Low

High*

Select By Host

Low

Off*

Rounded*

Exact

4234*

67XX

Standard (1/3)*

Special (4/9)

* Factory Default

IPDS

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Print Quality

Select By Host*

Default Font

Barcode

Size

4234*

67XX

64XX

4224

Default Code

Pag

Internat. Set 5*

English/USA/Can

Austrian/German

Belgian Old

Brazilian

Canadian/French

Danish/Norw.

Finnish/Swedish

French Azerty

Italian

Japanese/Eng.

Katakana

Portuguese

Spanish

Spanish Speak.

English (UK)

Arabic

Greek

Icelandic

Turkish Latin 5

Latin 2/ROECE

Cyrillic Old

Thai

Hebrew

Farsi

Yugoslavian

Latin 9

Euro US/Can.

Euro Aust/Germ.

Euro Dan/Norw.

Euro Fin/Swed.

Euro Italian

Euro Spanish

Euro UK/Ireland

Euro French

Euro Internat.

Euro Icelandic

Code Page

Subset

Thai

Version 0*

Version 1

Version 2

Hexdump

Mode

Disable*

Enable

VPA Check

Enable*

Disable

Default

Font

DRAFT 10*

DRAFT 12

DRAFT 13

DRAFT 15

DRAFT 17

DRAFT 18

DP 10

DP 12

DP 13

DP 15

DP 17

DP 18

Print IPDS

Fonts

NLQ 10

NLQ 12

NLQ 13

NLQ 15

NLQ 17

NLQ 18

OCRA

OCRB

PSM

IPDS Emulation

226

Chapter 4

IPDS Emulation

Your IPDS printer emulates the IBM 4234 twinax models 008 and 012.

IPDS Twinax printers can only print IPDS data streams and nothing else.

Even a simple job, such as a screen print, is IPDS data in a twinax

attachment. Because the printer definition on a twinax host is either set

automatically (by auto configuration) or manually, the printer type is already

known.

NOTE: A general discussion about starting and stopping IPDS can be found

in the IBM 4234 Product and Programming Reference Manual

(GC31-3879). Sending a non-IPDS data stream to an IPDS printer

and vise versa will result in a hung spool file or writer.

Font Size

This parameter chooses the font size which will be used by IPDS.

•

Select By Host (default). The font ID is only affected by host commands.

•

Standard. The font ID is converted to a decompressed font ID.

•

Compressed. The font ID is converted to a compressed font ID.

Print Quality

This parameter chooses the print quality.

•

Select By Host (default). The application decides the print quality.

•

Default Font. The default font the printer uses.

Graphics Quality

This parameter chooses the print quality of graphics.

•

High (default). Graphics are printed at 144 dot rows per inch.

•

Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the graphics.

•

Low. Graphics are printed at 72 dot rows per inch.

Barcode Quality

This parameter chooses the horizontal print quality of barcode labels.

•

High (default). Label is printed at 144 dots per inch.

•

Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.

•

Low. Label is printed at 72 dots per inch.

Barcode Speed

This parameter chooses the vertical print quality of barcode labels.

•

High (default). Barcodes are printed with less vertical dots, increasing

printing speed, but decreasing print quality.

•

Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels.

•

Low. Barcodes are printed with more vertical dots, decreasing printing

speed, but increasing print quality.

227

Barcode Size

This parameter will emulate the barcode sizes of the selected printer model.

•

4234 (default). IBM 4234

•

67XX. Decision Data 67XX

•

64XX. IBM 6400 series

•

4224. IBM 4224

Early Print Comp (Complete)

This parameter chooses when to send a Print Comp to the controller.

•

Off (default). Print Comp is sent if page is printed completely.

•

On. Print Comp is sent immediately. The next page will be created. This

improves the print performance when starting the next page.

NOTE: When Early Print Comp is enabled and an error occurs, you may lose

data.

Graphics Scaling

This parameter chooses the scaling factor for graphics when the Mapping

Control option of the IPDS Write Graphics Control command is SCALE TO

FIT:

•

Rounded (default). Calculations are rounded up in the desired output

resolution.

•

Exact. Graphics will be scaled as accurately as possible.

Graphic CharSize

This parameter will emulate the graphic character size of the selected printer

model.

•

4234 (default). IBM 4234

•

67XX. Decision Data 67XX

I2/5 Checksum

This parameter defines the printer checksum calculation method for

Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes.

•

Standard (1/3) (default). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 3 and the

even numbers by 1 for calculation of the checksum.

•

Special (4/9). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 4 and the even

numbers by 9 for calculation of the checksum.

NOTE: “Odd” refers to the 1st, 3rd, 5th... character in the barcode, while

“even” refers to the 2nd, 4th, 6th... character in the barcode.

Default Code Pag

Choose which code page to use with the IPDS emulation. This option is

independent of the Character Set selection in the CTHI emulation.

IPDS Emulation

228

Chapter 4

IPDS Emulation

Code Page Subset

When the Thai code page is selected as the default, either from the front

panel or by a host command, you may choose from three different versions.

Default Font

Choose a font quality and size from the available selections. All fonts in the

Default Font menu are available in standard and compressed vertical

resolution (see page 225).

VPA Check

•

Enable (default). The printer checks for dots that fall outside the

intersection of the logical and physical pages. If dots fall outside the area,

the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling

Control command setting requires error reporting.

•

Disable. The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area.

Hexdump Mode

A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal

equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the

host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.

Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception

problems.

Print IPDS Fonts

This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in

the active IPDS emulation

229

PCL - II Emulation

Primary Char.

Set

Page Length

Rep.

Max Line

Width

Face CPI

Delay

Graphics

Density

Perforation

Skip

Display

Functns

Line

Terminator

0* - 109, xx

Symbol Set

See page 230

Pitch

10*, 12, 13.3

15, 16.67, 20

Density

Data Processing*

NLQ

OCR-A

OCR-B

High Speed

Inches/Page*

Lines/Page

13.2 inches*

13.6 inches

Enable*

Disable

60 DPI*

70 DPI

Disable*

Enable

Disable*

Enable

LF After CR

CR After LF

CR After FF

CR After VT

* = Factory Default

PCL-II

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Second Char.

Set

Symbol Set

Delay

Disable*

Enable

PTX

Linefeed

Disable*

Enable

LPI Adjust

6 LPI*

8 LPI

Page L./Lines

66 Lines*

12 - 96 Lines

Page L./Inches

11.0 Inches*

12.0 Inches

12.5 Inches

13.0 Inches

15.5 Inches

16.0 Inches

2.0 - 10.5 Inches

0* - 109, xx

Symbol Set

See page 230

Pitch

10*, 12, 13.3

15, 16.67, 20

Density

Data Processing*

NLQ

OCR-A

OCR-B

High Speed

Symbol Set

Reset Cmd

CFG Ld

Current Config*

Factory Config

Disable

Power Up Config

Config. Print

Perforation

Skip

Disable*

Enable

PCL - II Emulation

230

Chapter 4

PCL - II Emulation

Primary

Char. set

(from page 229)

Symbol Set

Roman-8[8U]*

Turkish-8[8T]

Arab-8[8V]

Cyrillic[8R]

PC858 MtLi[13U]

MC Text[12J]

Roman-9[4U]

Latin-9[9N]

Win3.0Lat-1[9U]

Hebrew Old

Japan Postnet

Katakana Post

ASCII[0U]

Math Sym[0A/0M]

LineDraw[0B/0L]

IS0 Den/Nor[0D]

Roman Ext.[0E]

IS0 UK[1E]

IS0 France[0F]

IS0 German[0G]

Hebrew[0H]

Japan ASCII[0K]

Katakana[1K]

Block Char[1L]

OCR-A[0O]

OCR-B[1O]

ISO Swe/Fin[0S]

ISO Spain[1S]

ISO Italian[0I]

ISO Portugu[4S]

Latin-1[0N]

Latin-2[2N]

Latin-5[5N]

Latin-6[6N]

Baltic[19L]

PC8 DanNor[11U]

PC8 Cd437[10U]

PC850 MtLi[12U]

PC851 LtGk[12G]

PC852 Lat2[17U]

PC Turkish[9T]

PC Hebrew[15H]

PC Lat/Ara[10V]

PC Cyrillic[3R]

Win3.1Lat1[19U]

Win3.1Lat-2[9E]

Win3.1Lat-5[5T]

Math-8[8M]

PS Math[5M]

Greek-7[12N]

Postnet4[15Y]

Postnet11.25

Greek-8[8G]

Hebrew-8[8H]

Katakana-8[8K]

DEC 256 Greek

ELOT 928 Greek

Greek 3

ABY Greek

ABG Greek

ELOT 927 Greek

Greek 437

Greek 8859-7

Symbol Set

(same as Primary

Character Set)

Secondary

Char. Set

(from page 229)

231

Primary Char. Set

You can select one of 92 pre-defined character sets by ID (although character

sets range from 0 - 109, not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer), or you

can select pitch, symbol set, and typeface individually. If the combination you

choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets, the ID submenu will reflect

that selection. If not, the ID menu will display

to indicate that the current

character set does not match a pre-defined set. Set 0 is the default, and its

attributes are 10 cpi, Data Processing typeface, and Roman 8 symbol set.

Second Char. Set

Your printer can store an additional character set. To toggle between them,

send the Shift In (Decimal 15, to select the Primary character set) or Shift Out

(Decimal 14, to select the Secondary character set).

Page Length Rep.

•

Inches/Page (default). All page length calculations are based on the

inches displayed on the panel.

•

Lines/Page. All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly.

The length of the page is the number of lines per inch, or lpi.

For example, if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 lpi, the page is physically

13.67 inches. Since 13.67 inches is not selectable from the Length in

Inches menu, change the representation to lines, then set the number of

lines to 82. The inches menu will display 13.6 inches although the printer

internally keeps the exact form length of 13.67 inches.

Max Line Width

Set the maximum line width at 13.2 inches (default) or 13.6 inches.

Face CPI Delay

Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line.

•

Enable (default). Different font densities can be used on the same line.

•

Disable. Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line.

Graphics Density

Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI (default) or 70 DPI.

Perforation Skip

•

Disable (default). Allows printing on page perforation.

•

Enable. You may set up a skip-over margin. For example, a skip-over

margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page.

PCL - II Emulation

232

Chapter 4

PCL - II Emulation

Display Functions

•

Disable (default). Control characters are not printed.

•

Enable. Control characters are printed before they get executed. This is a

useful debugging tool.

Line Terminator

You can define the action of the line. Four options are available: LF after CR,

CR after LF, CR after FF, and CR after VT. Each of these options may be

enabled or disabled independent of one another.

PTX Linefeed

•

Disable (default). Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the

bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text

alignment.

•

Enable. The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top

of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing

graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter

to Enable to maintain text alignment.

LPI Adjust

This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values: 6 LPI (default)

or 8 LPI.

Page L./Lines

This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 lpi,

or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi. The default is 66 lines at 6 lpi.

NOTE: If 6 lpi is selected, you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 (an

invalid length). However, when you press ENTER to select this value,

the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 lpi (i.e., 96 lines).

Similarly, selecting too few lines for 8 lpi will cause the menu to return

with 16 lines.

Page L./Inches

This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches, in

increments of half an inch. The default is 11 inches.

Linefeed

LINE 1

Linefeed

LINE 2

LINE 3

LINE 1

LINE 2

LINE 3

PTX Linefeed Enabled PTX Linefeed Disabled

233

Config Print

This option prints the emulation's parameters and the currently selected

values.

Symbol Set Print

This option prints a list of all the available sets. The character set number

prints to the left of the character set sample.

Reset Cmd CFG Ld

When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to

resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.

•

Current Config (default). If you have preset and presaved multiple

configurations, then the currently selected presaved configuration is

loaded when the reset command is received.

•

Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the

reset command is received.

•

Disable. The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and

continues to use the currently loaded configuration.

•

Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset

command is received.

LG Emulation

Font Horiz Forms Autowrap CR

FF Unsolicited

Rpt

Print Mode

Opt

Plot Mode

Opt

(see page 234) Left Mrg 00.0*

Right Mrg 13.2

No*

Yes

= CR*

= CR + LF

= FF*

= CR + FF

No*

Small

Big

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

* = Factory Default

EMULATION

(from page 123)

Vert. Forms LF

= LF*

= CR + LF

I-2/5 Guard

Bars

Enable*

Disable

Bot Frm 66/6

Top Mrg 0/6

Bot Mrg 66/6

LG Emulation

234

Chapter 4

LG Emulation

DP 10 6*

DP 10 8

DP 12 6

DP 12 8

DP 15 6

DP 15 8

DP 15 10

HS 10 6

Corespon 5 6

Corespon 5 8

Corespon 6 6

Corespon 6 8

Corespon 10 6

Corespon 10 8

Corespon 12 6

Corespon 12 8

Corespon 15 6

Corespon 15 8

Corespon 15 10

OCR A

OCR B

Compress 6 6

Compress 6 8

Compress 8 6

Compress 8 8

Compress 13 6

Compress 13 8

Compress 13 10

Compress 16 6

Compress 16 8

Compress 16 10

DP 5 6

DP 5 8

DP 6 6

DP 6 8

GL Char Set

U.S. ASCII*

DEC Finnish

French

DEC Fr. Can.

German

Italian

JIS Roman

DEC Nor./Dan.

Spanish

DEC Swedish

DEC Great Brit.

ISO Nor./Dan.

DEC Dutch

DEC Swiss

DEC Portuguese

VT100 Graphics

DEC Suppl.

DEC Technical

ISO Katakana

7-Bit Hebrew

7-Bit Turkish

Greek Suppl.

Hebrew Suppl.

Turkish Suppl.

GR Char Set

DEC Suppl.*

DEC Technical

VT100 Graphics

ISO Katakana

ISO Latin 1

ISO Latin 2

ISO Latin 5

ISO Latin 9

ISO Cyrillic

ISO Greek

ISO Hebrew

Hebrew Suppl.

Turkish Suppl.

Style Character Set

Font

(from page 233)

235

Font

Select a default font style and character set for the LG emulation, as follows:

•

Style. This option allows you to specify a print quality that includes a

characters per inch (cpi) and lines per inch (lpi) setting, in the format Type

cpi lpi. The default setting is DP 10 6 (Data Processing, 10 cpi, 6 lpi). The

print quality types you may choose from are as follows:

DP = Data Processing (standard quality)

CORESPON = Correspondence (near letter quality)

COMPRESS = Compressed (vertically compressed for printing

long graphs and charts)

OCR A & OCR B = Optical Character Recognition, sets A

and B

HS = High Speed (Draft quality for high speed printing)

•

Character Set. This option allows you to select a character set. The

character set you select can be any of the Digital Multinational sets, which

include the U.S. ASCII set and several foreign language and special

character sets.

Vert Forms

•

Bot Frm 66/6 (default). This option sets the bottom margin for the forms.

You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging

from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right

arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER

to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to

0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.

•

Top Mrg 6/0.This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must

specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198

lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to

increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to

change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and

bottom margins do not cross each other.

•

Bot Mrg 66/6. This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must

specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to

198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to

increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to

change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0,

so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected.

LG Emulation

236

Chapter 4

LG Emulation

Horiz Forms

•

Left Mgr 0.00 (default). This sets the left margin for the forms. You must

specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1 inches. The

default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to

decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will

automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each

other.

•

Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify

the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The

default value is 13.2. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left

arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins

will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross

each other.

Autowrap

This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of

text exceeds the right margin.

•

No (default). Any print data received past the forms width setting is

discarded.

•

Yes. An automatic carriage return and line feed is performed when data is

received past the forms width setting.

This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage

Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each

time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed

code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host

computer sends line feeds to the printer.

•

= CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage

return.

•

= CR + LF. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a

Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the

data stream. (Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line

Feeds to the printer with each Carriage Return.)

This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code

into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in

most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send

carriage returns to the printer.

•

= LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next

print position will be the current print position of the next line.

•

= CR + LF. Each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an

additional Carriage Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This

feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host

computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer.

237

This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code

into the data stream whenever a Form Feed code occurs. This can be used in

most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send

carriage returns to the printer.

•

= FF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next

print position will be the current print position of the next form.

•

= CR + FF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print position

will be print position 1 of the next form.

Unsolicited Rpt

This option enables or disables Printer Device Status Reports to be sent to

the host when a reportable status or error condition has occurred.

•

No (default). Disables all unsolicited status reports from the printer.

•

Small. Enables brief unsolicited status reports and sends an extended

status report to the host.

•

Big. Enables extended, unsolicited status reports and sends an extended

status report to the host.

Print Mode Opt

When enabled, this option affects the SPI, SHS, and DECSHORP

commands. The printer will no longer be forced into these commands and

print speed improves significantly when in portrait orientation. For SHS and

DECSHORP, the character size will change with the selected pitch. In

addition, SGR attributes such as bold, crossed-out, and italics, will be done in

print mode with greater efficiency.

•

Enable (default). Enables the print mode option.

•

Disable. Disables the fpirnt mode option. This provides compatibility with

older LG printer products.

Plot Mode Opt

When enabled, this option will plot with greater efficiency, particularly with

respect to the Postnet barcode. Postnet is printed in the same density as the

current print mode font so that reverse motion will be inhibited when possible.

•

Enable (default). Enables the print mode option.

•

Disable. Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with

older LG printer products.

I-2/5 Guard Bars

•

Enable (default). Horizontal guard bars are printed above and below each

Interleaved 2/5 bar code. This option only applies to Interleaved 2/5 bar

codes.

•

Disable. Interleaved 2/5 bar codes are printed normally, with no guard

bars.

LG Emulation

238

Chapter 4

OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

The Postscript/PDF data is handled by Ghostscript by Artifex, an interpreter

compatible with the following:

•

Portable Document Format (“PDF”) 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6 as

defined in the Portable Document Format Reference Manual, distributed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated.

•

PostScript (TM) Language Level 3, as defined in the PostScript Language

Reference Third Edition (ISBN 0-201-37922-8), published by Addison-

Wesley in mid-1999.

EMULATION

(from page 76)

Postscript/PDF

Resolution Paper Size

120x144 DPI*

90x96 DPI

180x180 DPI*

180x90 DPI

90x180 DPI

120x120 DPI

90x90 DPI

Custom

Width

Length

US Fanfold*

Letter

Legal

Executive

10x14 Inch

12x12 Inch

13.6x12 Inch

Tabloid 11x17in

JIS B5

US Folio

No. 10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

C6 Envelope

ISO B5

Paper Size

Fault

Ignore*

Fault

* = Factory Default

Values for standard printers.

Values for HD printers.

Clip Page

Enable*

Disable

Move to TOF

Disable

At End of Job

At End of Page*

Gray Adjust

-10 to 10

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

239

Ghostscript includes a set of 35 scalable outline fonts in PostScript Type 1

format, compatible in appearance and metrics with the fonts commonly

distributed under the following names:

•

Bookman (demi, demi italic, light, light italic)

•

Courier ((plain, oblique, bold, bold oblique)

•

Avant Garde (book, book oblique, demi, demi oblique)

•

Helvetica (plain, oblique, bold, bld oblique narrow, narrow oblique, narrow

bold, narrow bold oblique)

•

Palatino (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)

•

New Century Schoolbook (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)

•

Times (roman, italic, bold, bold italic)

•

Symbol

•

Zapf Chancery (medium italic)

•

Zapf Dingbats

The Ghostscript version used in the P7000 is 8.71.

Resolution

This parameter defines the default print resolution. This selection is used

when either the print resolution is not defined by the data stream or if the print

resolution defined by the data stream is not supported.

The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P7000 STD products:

•

120x144 DPI (default)

•

90x96 DPI

The following resolutions are available on OpenPrint P7000 HD products:

•

180x180 DPI (default)

•

180x90 DPI

•

90x180 DPI

•

120x120 DPI

•

90x90 DPI

240

Chapter 4

OpenPrint POSTSCRIPT/PDF Emulation

Paper Size

This parameter allows selection of available paper sizes. This parameter

should be set according to the dimensions of the physical paper installed in

the printer. This parameter will be used to determine the TOF and is expected

to change when new media is installed. Available options include:

•

Custom. Sets a user-defined paper size.

•

Width. Defines the paper width. The range is 1” to 15” in 0.1 inch

increments. The default is 13.6 inches.

•

Length. Defines the paper length. The default is 11 inches. Three

length options are available:

Inches. Defines the length in inches. The range is 1” to 24” in 0.1

inch increments.

1/6 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/6 inch lines. The range is 6

to 144 lines.

1/8 Inch Lines. Defines the length in 1/8 inch lines. The range is 8

to 192 lines.

To set a custom length, use the appropriate menu that allows for selection of

the exact paper length to avoid loss of top-of-form (i.e., if using a 12” paper,

select either the “Inches” menu set to 12” or the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu set to

72. However, if using a 11 2/3 inch paper length, the “1/6 Inch Lines” menu

must be used (set to 70) since that is exactly 11 2/3 inches. If the “Inches”

menu is used, the closest values would be 11.6 or 11.7 inches which are not

exact.

The printer will indicate which of the three length menus was used by showing

that submenu first when entering the “Length” menu. The configuration

printout will also show the length menu used.

•

See Table 3 for paper size options and actual sizes.

Table 10. Paper Size Options and Actual Size

Paper Size Actual Size

US Fanfold 13.6 x 11 in

Letter 8.5 x 11 in

Legal 8.5 x 14 in

Executive 7.3 x 10.5 in

A3 11.7 x 16.5 in

A4 8.3 x 11 2/3 in

A5 5.8 x 8.3 in

A6 4.1 x 5.8 in

10x14 Inch 10 x 14 in

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

241

NOTE: When host jobs have page sizes that do not match the Paper Size

parameter, the printer will behave based on the Paper Size Fault, Clip

Page, and Move to TOF parameters.

Paper Size Fault

If a page is sent to the printer with dimensions that do not match the printer,

then the following will happen based on the Paper Size Fault menu selected.

•

Ignore (default). The page will print and the paper size length will be

ignored. However, the width will be clipped according to the front panel

width setting.

•

Fault. The printer enters a fault state and goes offline. The user will need

to either clear the fault and continue, or load new media and change the

Paper Size menu selection. Once the printer is back online, printing will

resume.

Clip Page

This menu defines the action when a page is sent to the printer with a length

that is longer than the selected paper size length.

•

Enable (default). The page will be clipped at the paper size length. In

cases where the sent page is longer than the paper size length, the

“Move to TOF” menu setting has no effect since the page is clipped at the

TOF position.

•

Disable. The page will not be clipped and printing continues on the next

page. The action taken by the printer when printing of the page completes

is determined by the Move to TOF menu.

NOTE: Page clipping at paper size width is always enabled to protect against

printing on the platen.

12x12 Inch 12 x 12 in

13.6x12 Inch 13.6 x 12 in

Tabloid 11x17in 11 x 17 in

JIS B5 7.2 x 10.1 in

US Folio 8.5 x 13 in

No. 10 Envelope 4.1 x 9.5 in

DL Envelope 4.3 x 8.7 in

C5 Envelope 6.4 x 9 in

C6 Envelope 4.5 x 6.4 in

ISO B5 6.9 x 9.8 in

Table 10. Paper Size Options and Actual Size

Paper Size Actual Size

242

Chapter 4

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

Move to TOF

When the page length given does not match the printer, the printer driver will

have to determine how the TOF is kept relative to each page printed. The

following menu options are available through the front panel and the driver:

•

Disable. Only when the FF key is pressed.

•

At End of Job. After the Current Job.

•

At End of Page (default). After each Page Printed.

Gray Adjust

This menu adjusts the darkness of the gray elements on the page by

gradually reducing or increasing the amount of dots that are placed in the

halftone patterns. Pure white and black colors are not affected by setting.

The menu ranges from -10 to +10. The default value is 0.

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

-10

All

White

-9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0

Default

123 456 78 9 10

All

Black

SURE SCAN

(from page 75 and

page 76)

Optimize

Barcode

Yes*

Test

Alignment

Left

Center*

Right

Hor. Quiet

Zone

0.20 Inch*

0 to 0.99 inch

Ver. Erase

Zone

0.00 Inch*

(0 to 0.99 inch)

Update

PDF

Embedded Only*

Always

* = Factory Default

Available when Postscript/PDF is selected as the Active Emulation

on OpenPrint P7000 products.

Display menu only.

Quiet Zone

Fault

Enable*

Disable

Barcodes On

Page

Auto*

1, 2,...,20

Bcodes

Optimized

xxxxxx

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

243

Optimize Barcode

Defines whether the barcode optimization feature is active.

•

Yes (default). Activates the barcode optimization feature.

•

No. Deactiviates the barcode optimization feature.

•

Test. Boxes will print around all barcodes that are detected and

optimized. This provides a simple method to confirm that the software

correctly detects and optimizes all the barcodes on any given form.

NOTE: Barcodes will not optimize at densities of 96 dpi or less. For densities

with one dimension more than 96 and one 96 or less, barcodes will

only replace in one orientation. For instance, 180x90 picket fence

barcodes will be optimized and 90x180 ladder barcodes will be

optimized.

Alignment

Defines how the optimized replacement barcode will be positioned with

regard to the original barcode position if no obstacles exist to this placement.

It defines the first attempted position of the replacement barcode. If the first

attempted position causes a replacement barcode to interfere with any other

form elements (text, graphics, or dots), the replacement barcode

automatically adjusts away from these interfering elements until requested

horizontal quiet zones are observed. Selections for this menu are as follows:

•

Left. The first attempted position of the leftmost bar of the replacement

barcode will be the same position as the leftmost bar of the original

barcode. For instance, if the replacement barcode is smaller than the

original barcode, it will be placed as follows:

If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the

replacement barcode will begin at the left edge of the original barcode

and expand beyond the right edge.

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

244

Chapter 4

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots) immediately to the right of the

original barcode can force this first attempted placement to be modified.

The replacement barcode will shift left to avoid obstacles on the right

provided that there are also no obstacles on the left.

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

Here is

obstacle

(text)

Quiet Zone

Distance

(picket)

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

245

•

Center (default). The first attempted position of the center bar of the

replacement barcode will be the same position as the center bar of the

original barcode.

If the replacement barcode is smaller than the original barcode, it will be

replaced as follows:

If the replacement barcode is longer than the original barcode, it will still

be centered, but it will extend beyond the end of the original barcode on

both the left and the right.

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

246

Chapter 4

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

If form elements interfere with this placement on the right or the left, the

barcode will automatically adjust away from these obstacles. Form

obstacles may force a center-aligned barcode to look left or right aligned.

For instance, in the below picture, a center-aligned barcode has text 0.2

inches away from the right edge of the original barcode. With a horizontal

quiet zone of 0.2 inches, the resulting replacement barcode position is

exactly the same regardless of whether center, right, or left alignment is

chosen. Regardless of the first attempted position, the barcode will need

to shift to the left until the horizontal quiet zone can be observed.

•

Right. The first attempted position of the rightmost bar of the replacement

barcode will be the same position as the rightmost bar of the original

barcode.

For instance, if the replacement barcode is shorter than the original

barcode it will be placed as follows:

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

Here is

obstacle

(text)

Quiet Zone

Distance

(picket)

Replacement Barcode

Original Barcode

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

247

If the replacement barcode is larger than the original barcode, the

replacement barcode will end at the right edge of the original barcode and

extend past the left edge. Any form elements (text, graphics, or dots)

immediately to the left of the original barcode, however, can force this first

attempted placement to be modified. The replacement barcode will shift

right to avoid obstacles on the left provided that there are also no

obstacles on the right.

Hor. Quiet Zone

This menu defines the quiet zones (empty areas) width before and after the

start/stop codes regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. When

positioning the barcode, the quiet zone is taken into account when detecting

collisions with other elements (dots) on the form. If one of the horizontal quiet

zones is violated, the barcode will automatically shift to the left or right (for

picket fence orientation) or up or down (for ladder orientation) to remove the

quiet zone violation.

The width of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch

increments. The default is 0.20 inches. This feature ensures that the

replacement barcodes will be properly scanned.

Barcodes are

automatically adjusted

away from text (or other

obstacles on the form)

until the Hor. Quiet

Zone distance is met.

Quiet Zone

distance

(picket)

Quiet Zone

distance

(ladder)

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

248

Chapter 4

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

Ver. Erase Zone

This menu defines the area above and below the bars that will be erased,

regardless of picket fence or ladder orientation. It is used when the barcode

has extraneous data beyond the bars that need to be deleted as it is being

optimized.

The height of the area can be defined between 0 and 0.99 inches in 0.01 inch

increments. The default is 0 inches (no empty space). This feature can be

used to remove special attributes remainders of the original barcode such as

a guard bar or line that borders the top and bottom of the bars. It can also be

used to erase the original PDF if the user wants to force all PDFs to be

optimized (see Update PDF on page 249). The PDF occupies more than 1/6

of an inch.

Quiet Zone Fault

This menu defines whether a fault must be reported on the front panel LCD if

the BCDOPT feature cannot print the replacement barcode without violating

the quiet zone as defined in the “Hor. Quiet Zone” menu, where the width of

the replacement barcode plus quiet zones is too large to fit the available white

space on the page.

•

Enable (default). If this fault occurs, reduce the quiet zone to see if the

barcode fits.

•

Disable. Quiet zone violations are not reported, but adjacent page

elements could be drawn too close to replacement barcodes and possibly

overlap.

Vertical Erase Distance

Erase

Area

(picket)

Erase

Area

(ladder)

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

249

Update PDF

There are two distinct cases with barcode PDFs. In the first case, the PDF is

partially embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars also erases the

PDF. In the second case, the PDF is printed entirely above or below the

barcode and is not disturbed by the barcode replacement.

Whenever the PDF is embedded in the barcode such that erasing the bars

also erases the PDF, the embedded PDF will be automatically detected and

replaced. An area surrounding the barcode will be erased to remove the

portions of the former PDF that extended beyond the bounds of the original

barcode. The erase area is shown in the figure below. Since embedded PDFs

are automatically replaced, the Upeate PDF menu option has no effect on this

type of PDF.

When the PDF is printed above or below the barcode, the behavior will

depend on the Update PDF menu setting.

•

Embedded Only (default). Embedded PDFs will not be replaced. This

allows the user to keep the present PDF data and its font, etc.

•

Always. PDFs will always reprint. For instance, since the original PDF will

not be centered with respect to the replaced barcode, the user may want

to always replace the PDF. When set to Always, an extra 1/6” is erased to

remove the original PDF. If the original PDF is not fully erased, it is up to

the user to increase the Ver. Erase Zone setting such that the original

PDF will be completely erased prior to the replacement being printed.

Erase

Area

1/6 ”

1/6 ”1/6 ”

Erase

Area

Erase

Area

1/6 ”

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

250

Chapter 4

OpenPrint SURE SCAN Menu

Barcodes on Page

This setting defines the number of barcodes that must be detected on the

form. If the value is set to “Auto” (default), no particular number of barcodes

are required to be detected. If the value is set to a number between 1 to 20,

then the number of barcodes set is required to be detected on each form. If

the printer detects fewer barcodes than the value set, the fault “x/y

BARCODES / Not Found” is declared. x represents the number of barcodes

not found, and y represents the Barcodes on Page value. Printing will not

continue until the user clears this fault.

Bcodes Optimized

This is a display menu that continuously counts the number of barcodes that

have been optimized since power-up. This statistic only resets to zero when

the printer is powered off. This menu can be used as a diagnostic to check the

number of barcodes optimized over a period of time or over a batch file.

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

251

PRINTER CONTROL Menu

Ribbon End Point

This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon

as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a

darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting

is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%. The range of

values are as follows:

•

Normal (default)

•

Darker +1 through Darker +6

•

Lighter -1 through Lighter -10

NOTE: This value can be adjusted at any time and the display will

automatically adjust to show the correct percentage relative to the

new end point.

PRINTER

CONTROL

(from page 65)

Unidirectional

Accented

Char

Open Platen

@BOF

Tear Bar

Dist.

Display

Language

Disable*

Enable

Standard*

Tall

Disable*

Enable

7.46 inches.*

(4.5 - 10.5)

English*

German

French

Italian

Spanish

Portuguese

* Factory Default

Not available in LG or PCL-II

Available for Pedestal printers only.

Not available when Postscript/PDF is active.

Bar Code

Quality

Dark*

Draft

Ribbon End

Point

Darker +6

Darker +5

Darker +4

Darker +3

Darker +2

Darker +1

Normal*

Lighter -1

Lighter -2

Lighter -3

Lighter -4

Lighter -5

Lighter -6

Lighter -7

Lighter -8

Lighter -9

Lighter -10

View

Function

Disable*

Enable

PRINTER CONTROL Menu

252

Chapter 4

PRINTER CONTROL Menu

Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)

Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through

the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen

when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter,

you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between

perforations.

Bar Code Quality

Determines the bar code resolution for all emulations, except IPDS. (See

“IPDS Emulation” on page 225 to set the bar code quality for IPDS.)

•

Dark (default). Bar code resolution is set at 120 x 72.

•

Draft. Bar code resolution is set at 60 x 72.

Tear Bar Dist. (Distance)

Allows fine and course adjustment of the tear bar position. For a pedestal

model printer using the top paper exit, the default (7.46 inches) is used. You

can specify 4.5 to 10.5 inches in .01 inch increments to accommodate

variations in cover and form design.

View Function

•

Disable (default). Disables the View Function which allows you to press

the VIEW/EJECT key to move the last data printed to the tractor area for

viewing.

•

Enable. Enables the View Function.

NOTE: Default setting is Enable for Indian language printers.

Unidirectional

The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed. By

setting this feature, you can configure the printer to print in both directions of

the shuttle sweep (bidirectional), or to print in one direction only

(unidirectional).

•

Disable (default). The printer will print all data in both directions of the

shuttle sweep (bidirectional printing). This choice produces higher printing

speed.

•

Enable. The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle

sweep (unidirectional printing). Although enabling this feature reduces

print speed, it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces

cleaner, sharper barcodes and text.

Display Language

This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,

German, French, Italian, Spanish, or Portuguese.

The factory default is English.

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

253

Accented Char

Selects whether the accented characters are standard or tall. See Figure 22

for an example. Selecting tall will slow print speed and may cause the printer

to back up during printing.

Figure 22. Accented Characters

Standard

Tall

PRINTER CONTROL Menu

254

Chapter 4

ADVANCED USER Menu

Power

Stacker

Auto

Elevator

Auto

Locking

Shuttle

Timeout

PTX Setup

Option

Enable*

Disable

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

Enable

Setup Parse

Enable*

Ignore

Disable

Setup SFCC

21h*

(1-FF hex)

* = Factory Default

If you have the CT option, Enable is the default value.

If installed

Not available in PCL-II

Not available in LG or PCL-II

Available for OpenPrint P7000 HD products only.

File

System

Overwrite Files

Enable*

Disable

View File List

Delete Files

Flash Avail.

Optimize&Reboot

Print File List

Set

Sharing

Disable*

Enable

Downloaded

Fonts

Hex Dump

Mode

Disable*

Enable

Power-up

State

Online*

Offline

PMD Fault

Enable*

Disable

Slow Paper

Slew

Alarm

On*

Cont. Beep

Off

Pwr Save

Control

Cancel

Key

Disable*

Enable

Enable*

Disable

Disable*

Enable

5 Seconds*

1-60 Seconds

Power Saver

Time

15 minutes*

(1 min - 240 min)

Instant

(5 sec - 30 sec)

RBN Low

Action

Warn & Continue*

Warn & Pause

RBN End

Action

Ignore RBN End*

Stop At RBN End

Char Operations

Delete frm Flash

Load from Flash

Save to Flash

Delete from RAM

Ld Char at Pwrup

Disable*

Enable

Set Operations

Delete frm Flash

Load from Flash

Save to Flash

Delete from RAM

Ld Set at PwrUp

Disable*

Enable

RBN Low

Warn @

Under 2%*

Under 5%

Under 10%

Under 20%

Under 30%

Ret. Status

Port

Disable

E-Net Data Port

Serial

E-Net Status Port

IEEE 1284

Automatic*

Set Lock

Key

Rcv. Status

Port

Automatic*

Serial

ADVANCED

USER

(from page 65,

67, 69, 71, 73,

75, and 76)

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

255

PTX Setup Option

Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX_SETUP command

and functions.

•

Setup Parse. Disables or enables the PTX_SETUP command.

•

Setup SFCC. Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character

you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX_SETUP command. Valid hex

values are 01-FF. The default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the

“!” character.

Hex Dump Mode

A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal

equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the

host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.

Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception

problems. The options include:

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable

Figure 26 on page 285. shows a hex dump sample.

Power-Up State

•

Online (default). The printer powers up in the online state.

•

Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state.

NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.

Downloaded Fonts

Allows you to download a substitution table to replace any character in the

current character set with a different character in the same font.

•

Char Operations. Allows you to delete a character from flash, load a

character from flash, save a character to flash, and delete a character

from RAM.

•

Ld Char at Pwrup. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at

power up.

•

Set Operations. Allows you to delete a character set from flash, load a

character set from flash, save a character set to flash, and delete a

character set from RAM.

•

Ld Set at PwrUp. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character set

at power up.

NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.

ADVANCED USER Menu

256

Chapter 4

ADVANCED USER Menu

PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault

•

Enable (default). In the event of a paper jam, an audible alarm beeps,

“CLEAR PAPER JAM” appears on the message display, and the printer

stops printing.

•

Disable. You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it.

CAUTION

Once PMD is disabled, paper motion is not monitored. If a paper jam

occurs, the printer ignores the condition and continues to print,

possibly causing damage to the printer.

Power Stacker

This parameter allows you to enable or disable the power paper stacker

(provided this option is installed).

Auto Elevator

This parameter exists only on printers with the power paper stacker installed.

The power stacker has a sensor which detects paper movement and raises

the stacker as the printed paper stack grows. If the printer has been printing

for three minutes continually and the sensor has not detected any growth in

the paper stack, the stacker raises itself 1/4 inch automatically.

•

Enable (default). The automatic elevator on the power stacker operates

normally.

•

Disable. The stacker does not raise automatically every three minutes

and is entirely dependent on the sensor. Diable is used with extremely

high-quality print jobs that take a long time to print.

Auto Locking

•

Disable (default). The ENTER key must be locked manually.

•

Enable. The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after

the last front panel key press.

File System

•

Overwrite Files. Allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by

disabling the overwrite function.

•

View File List. Displays the list of files in the file system. Pressing the

DOWN key displays the file size.

•

Delete Files. Displays the list of files in the file system. Pressing the

ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the front panel.

•

Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or

download files into flash.

•

Optimize&Reboot. Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files. After

pressing ENTER, wait for the printer to reboot.

NOTE: When the Optimize&Reboot option is executed, the message,

“Optimizing Flash Files” does not display before printer rebooting

takes place.

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

257

•

Print File List. Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and

several statistics on File System usage.

IMPORTANT

Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either

back online or offline.

Set Sharing

This option allows character sets to be shared between the active LP+

protocol and the active IGP emulation. If CT is installed and active, choosing a

character set in the CT activates that character set in the active IGP and LP+

protocols. (These changes will not be visible on the front panel.) If Set Sharing

is not selected, only the LP+ will share the CT's character set.

Switching host interfaces from CT to Centronics when the Set Sharing is

enabled will cause the LP+ character set to be activated to the same

character set of the active IGP, if possible.

In a non-CT system, changing characters sets in LP+ causes the active IGP

to change to the same character set if the selected set exists in IGP. If the

active IGP has no access to the selected set, no changes are made. Selecting

a new character set in the active IGP causes the LP+ to change to the same

character set if the selected character set exists in the active LP+ protocol.

Not all sets are shared between emulations in the Standard group of character

sets. As a result, selecting a set in the Standard group of LP+ or IGP

emulation may or may not cause the other emulation to have the same set.

NOTE: The Set Sharing front panel option has no effect on the LP+ and CT/

LP+ builds. The option only applies to the builds with IGP.

This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation.

Shuttle Timeout

The amount of time the shuttle continues moving after no data is received. If

your host is slow, setting the number to a higher value will prevent the printer

from spending time shuttling up and down between data bursts.

Slow Paper Slew

•

Disable (default). The paper will slew and stack paper at maximum

speed.

•

Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that

certain forms will stack neatly.

Alarm

•

On (default). An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault occurs,

such as a paper jam.

•

Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs,

which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.

•

Off. No audible alarm will sound.

ADVANCED USER Menu

258

Chapter 4

ADVANCED USER Menu

Power Saver Time

The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time

before the printer goes into Power Saver mode. When Instant is chosen, the

printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as it is able to stop the shuttle

properly. The time allotted to perform this function depends upon the shuttle

timeout value which can be set in the menu.

NOTE: Power Saver Mode will not be shown on the control panel even

though the function still exists. Sending a print job to the printer will

turn off Power Saver mode.

Pwr Save Control

Allows you to enable or disable the Power Save (Energy Star) mode.

•

Enable (default). Allows you to enable the Power Save (Energy Star)

mode.

•

Disable. Allows you to disable the Power Save (Energy Star) mode.

Cancel Key

•

Disable (default)

•

Enable. The CANCEL key may be used to clear all data in the print buffer

without printing any of the data.

Rcv. Status Port

This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status

command.

•

Automatic (default). When selected, the status command is sent to the

printer with the print data through the active host interface.

•

Serial. When selected, the status command is sent to the printer through

the serial interface regardless of the active host interface.

Ret. Status Port

This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands (i.e., ~STATUS

(PGL) and ~HS (ZGL)) to send the status data back to the Host.

The options are Automatic (factory default), Serial, E-NET Stat Port,

IEEE 1284, Disable, and E-NET Data Port.

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

259

Set Lock Key

Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the UP and DOWN keys are

pressed at the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose

different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any

group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ENTER

key or any key combinations which are already used for another function.

There is no limit to how many keys you can select.

To set the new lock key, follow these steps:

1. Work your way through the configuration menu until the display reads

“Set Lock Key” (follow the menu structure on page 254).

2. Press ENTER. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”

3. Press the combination of keys you want to be the new lock key. Make

sure you press all keys selected at the same time.

4. If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key

again.” If the selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key

selection.” Return to step 2 and start over.

5. Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the new lock key

combination is entered again correctly, the display will read, “Lock key

has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the display will read

“Verification failed.” Start over at step 2.

6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the ON LINE

key to put the printer back online.

NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered

off and back on.

RBN Low Warn @

This option allows the user to select the Ribbon Life value at which point the

printer will declare a ribbon low condition and display the "RIBBON UNDER

XX% / Change RBN Soon" warning message. The default is Under 2%. See

“RBN Low Action” below for details of how the printer behaves once a ribbon

low condition is reached.

The values are Under 2% (default), Under 5%, Under 10%, Under 20%, and

Under 30%.

ADVANCED USER Menu

260

Chapter 4

ADVANCED USER Menu

RBN Low Action

This menu determines how the printer behaves once a ribbon low condition is

reached.

•

Warn & Continue (default). Once a ribbon low condition is reached the

printer beeps and displays the "RIBBON UNDER XX% / Change RBN

Soon" warning message. Printing will continue without interruption. The

warning message can be cleared by pressing the ONLINE/Clear button,

however the message will persist again in two minutes. This action will

continue until a ribbon out (ribbon life reaches 0%) condition occurs.

•

Warn & Pause. This setting is similar to the Warn & Continue selection

with one exception. When a ribbon low condition is reached the printer will

still display the "RIBBON UNDER XX%/Change RBN Soon" warning

message, however the printer will stop printing. This is meant to get the

user’s attention. To resume printing the user must press the ONLINE/

Clear key.

NOTE: Printing will only stop on the first occurrence of a ribbon low condition.

Once the user clears the warning message, subsequent warnings will

display the warning message but printing will continue.

RBN End Action

This menu allows the user to override the normal ribbon low warning and

ribbon out conditions.

•

Stop At RBN End (default). When this factory default option is selected

the printer displays a warning message when a ribbon low condition is

reached and display a ribbon out fault when ribbon life reaches 0%.

•

Ignore RBN End. When this menu option is selected it overrides the

ribbon low and ribbon out conditions, i.e. no warning or fault messages is

displayed and printing continues even after ribbon life reaches 0%.

However, once the ribbon life reaches an excess wear condition as

indicated by the fault message "EXCESS RBN WEAR / Install New RBN",

printing will stop and the user must install a new ribbon before printing

can resume.

NOTE: The excess ribbon wear is set below the "Lighter -10" Ribbon End

Point setting.

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

261

DIAGNOSTICS Menu

Printer Tests

These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer.

NOTE: Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests.

They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual.

•

Shift Recycle. A sliding alphanumeric pattern which identifies missing or

malformed characters, improper vertical alignment, or vertical

compression.

•

All E's. A pattern of all uppercase E's which identifies missing characters,

misplaced dots, smeared characters, improper phasing problems, or light/

dark character variations.

•

E's + TOF. A pattern of all E's followed by a form feed to the next page

top-of-form, which identifies paper motion or feeding problems.

Printer Tests

Shift Recycle*

All E’s

E’s + TOF

All H’s

All Underlines

All Black

Shuttle Slow

Shuttle Fast

Shuttle Only

Phase Printer

Paperout Adj.

Burnin Test

Print Error Log

Clear Error Log

Adapter Test

Ethernet Test

Acoustics

Demo

Dice 5

Prnt Ribbon Log

Checker

Full Width*

80 col.

40 dots*

(4-76)

76 dots *,

(40 - 112)

32 Megabytes

* = Factory Default

If Ethernet adapter is present

Not available in PCL-II or LG

Not available in LG

If a Feature File exists.

Values for OpenPrint P7000 HD printers.

If the network is enabled.

Test Width Paper Out

Dots

System

Memory

On: x.x Hrs.

Print: x.x Hrs

Print Strokes:

xxxxxx

Print Lines:

xxxxxx

11 inch Pages:

xxx

Statistics

SW P/N + Ver

Software

Build

P/N of File

Feature

File

xxxx

Shuttle

Type

DIAGNOSTICS

(from page 65,

67, 69, 71, 73,

75 and 76.)

DIAGNOSTICS Menu

262

Chapter 4

DIAGNOSTICS Menu

•

All H's. A pattern of all uppercase H's used to detect missing characters,

misplaced dots, smeared characters, or improper phasing.

•

All Underlines. An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank

misalignment.

•

All Black. A condition where all dot positions are printed, creating a solid

black band.

•

Shuttle Slow. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon

motion at low speed.

•

Shuttle Fast. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon

motion at fast speed.

•

Shuttle Only. Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed.

•

Phase Printer. Checks for wavy print. The initial phase value is set in the

factory. Run the test and check the quality. (The phase value prints on the

left margin.) If the print looks too wavy, change the Phase Value

parameter while the test is running. While the phase printer test runs,

press the DOWN key. To change the value, press the PREV or NEXT key

until the desired value displays and then press ENTER.

•

Paperout Adj.. Verifies the current Paper Out Dots setting, which

determines where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out

condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.

•

Burnin Test. Reserved for factory use.

•

Print Error Log. Prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine faults

(ribbon stall, voltage faults) are stored in the error log.

•

Clear Error Log. Clears entries in the error log.

•

Adapter Test. Prints the Ethernet adapter statistics stored on the

Ethernet adapter (if present).

•

Ethernet Test. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet (if

present).

•

Acoustics. A particular test pattern that is used to measure acoustics.

•

Demo. Demonstration of various print attributes.

•

Dice 5. Pattern used to measure print density.

•

Prnt Ribbon Log. Prints log of cartridge installed in the printer.

•

Checker. For factory use. This pattern helps identify marginal printhead

elements, quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.

Test Width

Set this parameter to run the self-tests at full width or 80 columns.

Paper Out Dots

CAUTION

Only authorized service representatives should set this parameter.

This parameter is used to adjust the paper out distance from the perforation;

you can specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper

out condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

263

System Memory

Displays the amount of RAM installed.

Print Statistics

You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive

maintenance purposes. Printer statistics accumulate continuously; they do

not reset when you turn off the printer. All of the printer statistics are set to

zero at the factory after burn-in testing.

•

On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The

range is 0 to 30,000 hours.

•

Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing.

The range is 0 to 30,000 hours.

•

Print Strokes. The cumulative number of back-and-forth shuttle strokes

the printer has printed during normal printer operation. The range is 0 to

2,147,483,647 shuttle strokes.

•

Print Lines. The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed. The

range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 print lines.

•

11 inch Pages. The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed.

The range in print pages is 0 to 2,147,483,647 total inches of paper

movement divided by 11.

•

Poweron Pages. The number of pages the printer has printed since

power-up.

Software Build

Displays the part number and version of the printer firmware.

Feature File

Displays the part number of the file if one has been downloaded to the printer.

Shuttle Type

Displays the type of shuttle installed, i.e. 2000s, 1500, 1000, 500, or high

definition.

DIAGNOSTICS Menu

264

Chapter 4

DATE Menu

Hour

This option allows you to set the hour. The factory default is 00 and the range

is from 00 to 23 hours.

Minute

This option allows you to set the minutes. The factory default is 00 and the

range is from 00 to 59 minutes.

Year

This option allows you to set the year. The factory default is 2099 and the

range is from the year 2000 to 2099.

Month

This option allows you to set the month. The factory default is Jan and the

range is from Jan to Dec.

Day

This option allows you to set the day. The factory default is 01 and the range

is from 01 to 31 days.

DATE

(from page 65,

67, 69, 71, 73,

and 75)

Hour

00*

00 - 23

Minute Year

00*

00 - 59

2099*

2000 - 2099

Month

Jan*

Jan - Dec

Day

01*

01 - 31

* = Factory Default

Appears only if the real time clock option is installed.

Postscript/PDF Interpreter

265

PRINTER MGMT Menu

PNE Port

This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to connect to, via

Ethernet or Serial. The factory default is Ethernet. If the network is not

enabled, the default is Disable.

Mgmt Protocol

Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same Ethernet Port,

only one can be active at a time. This menu selects the active Management

Protocol Interface, either PXML or UCP. The factory default is UCP.

PNE Port Number

This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PNE to connect

through. The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1023 to 65535.

PNE Port Timeout

If the PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period, the

PNE session closes. The factory default is 100 seconds. The range is from 1

to 255 seconds.

Status Port Numb

This menu selects the port number the printer sends the emulation status.

The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1023 to 65535.

Mgmt Port Number

This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PXML or UCP to

connect through. The factory default is 3007 and the range is from 1023 to

65535.

PNE Port

UCP*

PXML

3001*

1023 - 65535

100 Seconds*

1-255 Seconds

* = Factory Default

Not available if PNE Port is set to Serial.

Mgmt Protocol PNE Port

Number

PNE Port

Timeout

3002*

1023 - 65535

Status Port

Numb

3007*

1023 - 65535

Mgmt Port

Number

Ethernet*

Disable

Serial

PRINTER MGMT

(from page 65, 67,

69, 71, 73, and 75)

PRINTER MGMT Menu

266

Chapter 4

PRINTER MGMT Menu

267

Interfaces

Overview

This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The

printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs

into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data

to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can

configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time (see “Auto

Switching Submenu” on page 88).

IMPORTANT

To comply with Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulatory

requirements all electrical signal interface cables connected to this

printer must be of a minimal quality level, be of the correct length, and

be properly installed.

The RS-232 port and parallel port interface cables must meet the

following specifications:

•

The cable design must be double shielded with a copper braid over

an aluminum mylar foil and not just a conductive foil spiral wrapped

around a drain wire.

•

The shield must terminate coaxially (360 degrees) to a metal

connector housing and not be terminated by just a simple wire lead.

•

The cable length, including connectors, must be 3 meters or less.

•

The cable connector anchor screws must be securely seated into

the printer receptor hardware.

For reference purposes only, two specific Centronics parallel port

cables that have been tested and found to comply with these

requirements are Belkin

part number F2A046-10 and Primelogic

part

number PLU 2823224. Other electrically equivalent cables are

acceptable.

This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer.

Standard Host Interfaces:

•

IEEE 1284 parallel

•

RS-232 Serial

268

Chapter 5

Dataproducts Parallel Interface

Optional Host Interfaces:

•

Ethernet 10/100BaseT

•

Coax/Twinax (not available in Taiwan)

•

RS-422 Serial (not available in Taiwan)

In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also

provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel

interfaces.

Dataproducts Parallel Interface

The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not

exceed 40 feet (12 meters).

Table 11. Dataproducts Parallel Interface Connector Pin Assignments

(with a 50-pin AMP HDH-20 Data Cable Connector)

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

DATA LINE 1

Return

READY

Return

CABLE VERIFY 45, 46

DATA LINE 2

Return

ONLINE

Return

GROUND 39

DATA LINE 3

Return

DEMAND/DATA REQ.

Return

DATA LINE 4

Return

PARITY ERROR 27

DATA LINE 5

Return

DATA LINE 6

Return

DATA LINE 7

Return

DATA LINE 8

Return

DATA STROBE

Return

PAPER INSTRUCTION

Return

BUFFER CLEAR

Return

NOTE: Pins not listed are not connected.

Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals

269

Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals

Data Lines 1 through 8. Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the

host that specify character data, plot data, or a control code. Data Line 8

allows access to the extended ASCII character set. You can enable or disable

this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Dataproducts submenu (see page

page 95).

Data Strobe. Carries a high true pulse from the host when data is ready. The

data strobe remains high until the Data Request line goes false. The active

edge of the strobe signal can be configured as leading, middle (default), or

trailing.

Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a DVFU signal from the host with the same

timing and polarity as the data lines.

Ready. Carries a high true signal from the printer when AC power and DC

voltages are present, paper is loaded properly, and the printer is not in a

check condition.

Online. Carries a high true signal from the printer when the Ready Line is true

and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been pressed. When the

printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host.

Demand/Data Request. Carries a high true signal from the printer when the

printer is ready to accept character data from the host. This signal changes to

false shortly after the leading edge of the data strobe signal.

Cable Verify. Two pins on the interface connector are jumpered together to

allow the user to verify proper installation of the interface connector.

Buffer Clear. A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should

perform a reboot.

Parity Error. Always carries a low false signal from the printer indicating there

is no parity error.

270

Chapter 5

Centronics Parallel Interface

The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not

exceed 15 feet (5 meters).

Table 12. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

DATA LINE 1

Return

ACKNOWLEDGE

Return

CHASSIS GROUND 17

DATA LINE 2

Return

ONLINE

Return

GROUND 30

DATA LINE 3

Return

FAULT

Return

Spares 14

DATA LINE 4

Return

PAPER EMPTY

Return

No Connection 34,35,

DATA LINE 5

Return

BUSY

Return

+5 Volts 18

DATA LINE 6

Return

DATA LINE 7

Return

DATA LINE 8

Return

DATA STROBE

Return

PAPER INSTRUCTION

Return

PRIME

Return

Centronics Parallel Interface Signals

271

Centronics Parallel Interface Signals

Data Lines 1 through 8. Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the

host that specify character data, plot data, or a control code. Data Line 8

allows access to the extended ASCII character set. You may enable or

disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu (see

page 92).

Data Strobe. Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that

clocks data into the printer.

Acknowledge. A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or

function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data

transfer.

Online. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for

data transfer and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been activated.

When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host.

Paper Empty (PE). A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is

in a paper empty or paper jam fault.

Busy. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive

data.

Prime. A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a

warm start (printer is reset to the power-up configuration values).

Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a CVFU signal from the host with the same

timing and polarity as the data line.

Fault. A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault.

272

Chapter 5

IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface

The 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by

negotiation between the printer and the host.

Compatibility Mode

This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 13).

Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data

lines.

Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide

bidirectional communication.

Nibble Mode

Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight

bits are sent over eight data lines.

Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,

the 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines. (Half a

byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over the

lines.

Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,

and the host controls the transmission.

Byte Mode

The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit

per line).

If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the

host will take control of the data transfer.

Signals

273

Signals

Table 13 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on

the 1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.

Table 13. 1284 Signals

Pin Source of Data Type of Mode

Compatible Nibble Byte

1Host nStrobe HostClk Host/Clk

2Host/Printer Data 1 (LSB)

3Host/Printer Data 2

4Host/Printer Data 3

5Host/Printer Data 4

6Host/Printer Data 5

7Host/Printer Data 6

8Host/Printer Data 7

9Host/Printer Data 8 (MSB)

10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk

11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy

12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq

13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag

14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck

15 Not Defined

16 Logic Grid

17 Chassis Grid

18 Printer Peripheral Logic High

19 Signal Ground (nStrobe)

20 Signal Ground (Data 1)

21 Signal Ground (Data 2)

22 Signal Ground (Data 3)

23 Signal Ground (Data 4)

24 Signal Ground (Data 5)

25 Signal Ground (Data 6)

274

Chapter 5

IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface

NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer

should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters).

Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by host. Data transferred from host to printer.

When printer sends data, two types are available. If Nibble mode, signal is set

high. If Byte mode, signal is set low.

Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility mode and

bidirectional in Byte mode. They are not used in Nibble mode. Data 1 is the

least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.

Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrup. Driven by the printer. A signal

from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received

and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.

Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.

Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble mode.)

Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the

printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble

mode.)

Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for

data transfer and the printer is on line. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode.)

Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates

auto-line feed mode.

Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the

printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the

printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.

nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a

return to Compatibility mode idle phase.

26 Signal Ground (Data 7)

27 Signal Ground (Data 8)

28 Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)

29 Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)

30 Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)

31 Host nInit

32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail

33 Not Defined

34 Not Defined

35 Not Defined

36 Host nSelectIn 1284 Active 1284 Active

Table 13. 1284 Signals (continued)

Pin Source of Data Type of Mode

Compatible Nibble Byte

Terminating Resistor Configurations

275

nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the

printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode.)

1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.

Host Logic High—Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all

of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power

is off or its signals are in an invalid state.

nInit —Resets init interface from the host.

Terminating Resistor Configurations

V6 Controller Board

For parallel interface configurations, the printer is equipped with 470 Ohm and

and 1K Ohm terminating reistors on the controller board. These are suitable

for most applications. See Figure 23.

If the standard terminating resistor pack is not compatible with the particular

interface driver requirements of the host computer, other RP1 and RP2 values

may be required. 220 Ohm and 330 Ohm alternate terminating resistors are

provided with the printer. If you install the 220 Ohm resistor, you must also

install the 330 Ohm resistor. Possible terminating resistor combinations are

shown below.

Configuration RP1 RP2

Factory Default 470 Ohm 1K Ohm

Alternate 220 Ohm 330 Ohm

276

Chapter 5

RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces

Figure 23. Terminating Resistors, V6 Controller Board

Removal And Installation

The procedure for removing and installing terminating resistors is provided in

your Maintenance Manual.

CAUTION

This is an involved maintenance procedure. To avoid damage to the

equipment, only a trained technician should perform this procedure.

RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces

NOTE: The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interface circuit characteristics are

compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications

EIA-232-E and EIA-422-B.

The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit

serial devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial

data transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud

rates of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200

baud rates are available.

NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to

use RS-422 to prevent data loss.

The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not

exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232 or 4000 feet (1220 meters) for RS-422.

(A copper conductor, twisted-pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of

16 pF/foot [52.5 pF/meter] terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be

used for the RS-422.)

183480a

Default: 470/1K Ohm

Alt: 220/330 Ohm

RP1 and RP2

RS-232

277

RS-232

Receive Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.

Transmit Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status

and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.

Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to

configuration.

Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready

to receive data/status signals from the printer.

Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a

ready condition.

Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is

required for the printer to receive data.

Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to

configuration.

Table 14. Standard 500, 1000, 1500, and 2000 lpm Models

RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

Receive Data (RD) 3Transmit Status & Control

Data (TD)

2Chassis Ground 1

Clear To Send (CTS) 5Request To Send (RTS) 4Signal Ground 7

Data Set Ready (DSR) 6Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 20

Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 8

Table 15. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

Receive Data (RD) 2Transmit Status & Control

Data (TD)

3Chassis/Signal Ground 5

Clear To Send (CTS) 8Request To Send (RTS) 7

Data Set Ready (DSR) 6Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4

Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 1

278

Chapter 5

RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces

RS-422

+RD, -RD.Serial data stream differentially received by printer.

+TD, -TD.Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and

control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.

NOTE:

RD and

TD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal.

Table 16. PSA3 RS-422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments

Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous

Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin

- Receive Data

(-RD)

1- Transmit Data

(-TD)

3Chassis/Signal

Ground

+ Receive Data

(+RD)

6+ Transmit Data

(+TD)

279

Reprogramming the

Security Key

Reprogramming The Security Key

The security key on the PSA3 controller board can be reprogrammed with a

Software Program Exchange (SPX) module. The SPX is an intelligent module

that plugs into the debug port on the back of printers equipped with the PSA3

“Hurricane” controller board. The SPX is used only once; it automatically

overwrites itself after successfully reprogramming a security key. This allows

the end user or a service technician to enable features such as new

emulations without having to remove covers and install a new security key on

the controller board.

The SPX is used at power-up only and is not left in the printer during normal

operation. Because it is a single-use disposable item the user is not required

to return it to the vendor or manufacturer.

How To Program The Security Key

1. Power off the printer.

2. On cabinet models, open the rear door. On pedestal models, refer to

Figure 24 to locate the debug port at the rear of the printer.

3. Insert the SPX into the debug port as shown.

280

Chapter 6

Reprogramming The Security Key

Figure 24. Inserting The SPX into the Debug Port

4. Power on the printer. The printer will begin its boot-up sequence.

5. When the printer detects a valid SPX, the control panel displays:

“NEW SPX DETECTED

PRESS ENTER”

NOTE: If an error message displays, find the message in the Message List in

Chapter 7 and follow the troubleshooting instructions.

6. Press the ENTER key to activate the reprogramming sequence. The

display will read:

“PROGRAMMING. PLEASE WAIT.”

7. When the security key is reprogrammed, the display will read:

“REMOVE USED SPX

THEN PRESS ENTER”

8. Remove the SPX from the debug port at the rear of the printer.

9. Press the ENTER key. The printer will reboot itself and you may resume

normal printing.

10. You may need to download a new program file to use the new feature.

11. You may need to set additional menu parameters for any new features

that have been added or enabled.

183482b

183481b

Debug Port

SPX

281

Troubleshooting

Cleaning Requirements

Clean the printer every six months or after every 1000 hours of operation,

whichever occurs first. If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for

heavy duty printing, clean it more often.

WARNING

Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer.

Vor dem Säubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen.

Débranchez l’alimentation avant de nettoyer l’imprimante.

Desconecte la fuente de energía antes de limpiar la impresora.

Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante.

Exterior Cleaning

Clean the outside of the cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth and mild detergent

soap. (Dishwashing liquid works well.) Do not use abrasive powders or

chemical solvents. Clean the windows with plain water or mild window

cleaner. Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth; never pour cleaning

solution directly onto the printer.

282

Chapter 7

Cleaning Requirements

Interior Cleaning

Over time, particles of paper and ink accumulate inside the printer. This is

normal. Paper dust and ink build-up must be periodically removed to avoid

degraded print quality. Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the

platen and ribbon path.

Figure 25. Interior Printer Components

TOF

183871 REV A

183871a

Ribbon

Cartridge

Ribbon

Tension Knob

Air Shroud

Assembly

Tab (2)

Tab

Slot (2)

Blue Tractor

Lock (2)

Paper

Support (2)

Tractor (2)

Vertical

Position Knob

Platen Lever

Splined Shaft

Platen Stop

Hammer Bank

Cover and

Ribbon Mask

Ribbon Cartridge

Interface

Interior Cleaning

283

To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps.

1. Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord.

2. Open the printer cover.

3. Fully raise the platen lever.

4. Unload the paper.

5. Remove the ribbon cartridge.

6. Lift the ribbon out of the ribbon path.

7. Brush the paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors, shuttle cover

assembly, and base casting with a soft-bristled, non-metallic brush

(such as a toothbrush). Vacuum up the residue.

CAUTION

Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to

avoid damage. To avoid corrosion damage, use only alcohol when

cleaning the printer mechanical elements. Solutions used to clean

mechanical elements must contain no water.

8. Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth.

9. Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or

ribbon lint.

10. Remove dust and ink from the platen using a soft cloth lightly moistened

with anhydrous alcohol. (The platen is the thick silver bar behind the

hammer bank cover that rotates when the platen lever is rotated.)

CAUTION

When cleaning the platen, be very careful not to get any alcohol in the

hammer bank, because alcohol will cause severe damage to the

hammer bank. Only a trained service technician should clean the shuttle

assembly.

11. Brush and vacuum the accumulated dust or residue inside the lower

cabinet.

12. Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened (not

wet) with water and mild detergent or window cleaning solution. Dry the

lower cabinet interior by wiping it down with a clean, lint-free cloth.

13. Install the ribbon and load paper.

284

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

This section is designed to help you fix problems which may arise with normal

printer operation.

Bar Code Verification

The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure that

the bar code will be scanned properly. Incorporating a bar code quality

procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are

being printed correctly. A properly implemented verification procedure will

increase overall bar code quality, reduce waste from misprinted bar codes,

and achieve high first-time read rates. A high first-time read rate is an

increasingly important factor in newer, more efficient systems where manually

entered data is not acceptable as a backup function. Verification also

minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or

unaccountable bar codes.

Printing A Hex Dump

285

Printing A Hex Dump

A hex code printout (or hex dump) is a translation of all host interface data to

its hexadecimal equivalent, listing all ASCII character data received from the

host computer with their corresponding two-digit hexadecimal codes. Hex

dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems.

Printable characters print as the assigned symbol; nonprintable characters

are indicated by a period (.).

Figure 26 shows an example of a hex dump.

Figure 26. Hex Dump Sample

286

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

Fault Messages

If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control

panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.

Fault messages are summarized in Table 17.

Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:

•

Operator correctable

•

Field service required

For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 17.

After correcting the displayed fault, press the CANCEL key to clear the error

message and status indicator and resume printing. If the fault message

reappears, contact your authorized service representative.

NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and

procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the

procedures described there must be performed only by your

authorized service representative.

Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention

If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an

asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is

needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized

service representative:

1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the

printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not

appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.

2. If the message reappears, press the CANCEL key. If the message

disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If

the message reappears, call your authorized service representative.

Fault Messages

287

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

06 HOST REQUEST Yes Host attention message. The host computer or printer

controller requires attention.

08 HOLD PRINT

TIMEOUT

Yes Printer was offline more

than 10 minutes, and the

“Intervention Required”

parameter is set to “Send

to Host.”

Press ON LINE to put printer in

online state.

8.5V PWR FAIL* No 8.5 Volt power failed.

Internal power failure.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

15 COMM CHECK Yes A message that appears

in the CT emulation

meaning the line is not

active on a twinax

interface.

Check cable connection.

15V CTL FAIL* No Controller voltage failure. Contact your authorized service

representative.

22 INVALID ADDR Yes Unit address not

recognized by printer.

(Twinax interface)

Ensure that printer address

matches host setting.

23.5V CTL FAIL* No 23.5 Volt Controller

failed: a voltage failure on

the controller board.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

31 PAPER OUT

TIMEOUT

Yes A timeout message is

sent to the host if paper is

not loaded 10 minutes

after ON LINE/CLEAR

was pressed to clear the

paper out fault.

Load paper and run a print test. If

the message reappears, contact

your authorized service

representative.

32 PAPER JAM

TIMEOUT

Yes A timeout message is

sent to the host if no

paper motion has

occurred for 10 minutes

after ON LINE/CLEAR

was pressed to clear the

jam fault.

Clear paper jam and reload paper.

33 PLATEN OPEN

TIMEOUT

Yes The forms thickness lever

has been open for at

least one minute.

Load paper, close the forms

thickness lever, and press ON LINE/

CLEAR.

288

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

34 RIBBON STALL

TIMEOUT

Yes In the CT emulation with

a coax interface, the

ribbon has not moved for

10 minutes after

ON LINE/CLEAR was

pressed to clear the

ribbon drive fault.

Reload the ribbon.

48V CIRCUIT*

See User Manual

No Either the power supply is

not generating a proper

48 Volts or the controller

board is not detecting a

48 Volt output from the

power supply board.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

48V PWR FAIL* No Internal power failure. Contact your authorized service

representative.

A TO D OVERUN* No Analog to Digital

Overrun. The analog-to-

digital converter

overflowed.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ACCESS NULL PTR* No Access Null Pointer: The

processor tried to access

a pointer that contains

nothing (null).

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ACTIVATE LOST No The printer detects a

twinax protocol

communication error and

reports the error.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

B00 STATUS: SDRAM

DETECTION 166MHZ

No Status message: the

printer has begun its

boot-up routines and is

checking for the

presence of SDRAM.

No action required.

B01 STATUS: 8245

SDRAM TEST 32MB

No Status message: printer

boot-up routines are

testing SDRAM.

No action required.

B10 ERROR: NO

DRAM DETECTED*

No SDRAM DIMM may not

be properly installed.

Boot-up routines did not

detect the presence of

the SDRAM DIMM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B11 ERROR: RAM

TEST FAILED*

No SDRAM failed the boot

initialization test. SDRAM

DIMM may not be

properly installed.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

289

B12 ERROR:

PROGRAM MISSING*

Yes The printer does not see

a program in flash

memory.

There is no program in printer

memory. Download an emulation.

B13 ERROR: NOT

COMPATIBLE*

No Attempting to download a

program that is not

compatible with the

printer.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B19 ERROR: DC

RETURNED*

No The message indicates

an incorrectly assembled

and tested machine.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B20 STATUS :00%

DOWNLOAD MODE

No Status message

informing the operator

that software is being

downloaded. Percentage

figure indicates

approximate amount

loaded into the printer.

No action is required.

B21 STATUS:

PRINTER RESET

No Status message

informing the operator

that the printer is

undergoing a system

reset.

No action is required.

B22 ERROR:

DECOMPRESS SIZE*

No FLASH memory has not

passed boot initialization

tests.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B23 ERROR:

DECOMPRESS

CKSUM*

No FLASH memory has not

passed boot initialization

tests.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B30 STATUS:

INITIALIZING...

N/A Status message: the

printer is running its

initialization routines after

startup and successful

memory tests.

No action is required.

B35 STATUS:

WAITING FOR EC

STATUS

N/A Status message: the DC

on the controller board is

waiting for

communication with the

EC. If this message does

not clear witin a few

seconds there is an

electrical or electronic

problem on the controller

board.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

290

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

B40 ERROR: SDRAM

EEPROM CKSUM

BAD*

No Flash memory has not

passed boot initialization

tests.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B41 ERROR: DIM

MEMORY NOT

SDRAM*

No The DRAM DIMM

installed on the controller

board is not Synchronous

DRAM (SDRAM).

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B42 ERROR: SDRAM

ROWS NOT

ALLOWED*

No Printer boot initialization

tests detect incorrect

SDRAM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B43 ERROR: SDRAM

TOO MANY BANKS*

No Printer boot initialization

tests detect incorrect

SDRAM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B44 ERROR: SDRAM

NOT 64 BITS WIDE*

No Printer boot initialization

tests detect incorrect

SDRAM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B45 ERROR: SDRAM

IS WRONG VOLTAGE*

No Printer boot initialization

tests detect incorrect

SDRAM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B46 ERROR: SDRAM

HAS MIXED SIZES*

No Printer boot initialization

tests detect incorrect

SDRAM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B47 ERROR: SDRAM

LARGER THAN 256M*

No Printer boot initialization

tests detect incorrect

SDRAM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B49 ERROR: SDRAM

# LOGICAL BANKS*

No Printer boot initialization

tests detect incorrect

SDRAM.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B50 ERROR: SDRAM

LOGIC COMB BANKS*

No SDRAM DIMM is not

compatible with the

computer. SDRAM DIMM

may not be properly

installed.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B50 STATUS: XX%

CLEAR FLASH

No Emulation software

sucessfully loaded in

RAM. Old program being

deleted from flash

memory.

No action is required.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

291

B51 STATUS: XX%

No Status message: printer

boot-up routines are

loading printer system

software into flash

memory and SDRAM.

No action required.

B53 ERROR: 12C NO

ARBITRATION

No There is a problem on the

C bus which allows the

SDRAM DIMM to

communicate with the

GPIO or CT interface.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B54 ERROR: SDA

LINE STUCK LOW

No The SDRAM or a PCI

card is shorting out the

serial data bus on the

controller board.

Cycle power to see if the message

clears, if not, contact your

authorized service representative.

B55 STATUS: SEND

PROGRAM TO EC

No EC program downloaded

and being programed in

EC.

No action is required.

x/y BARCODES /

Not Found

Yes In the OpenPrint

products, SURE SCAN

detects fewer barcodes

than the set value for

"Barcodes on Page"

menu option. x

represents the number of

barcodes not found, and

y represents the

"Barcodes on Page"

value.

SURE SCAN success depends on

the symbology, quality of the

barcode graphic, and dimensions of

the barcode. See “OpenPrint SURE

SCAN Menu” on page 242 for more

information.

BUFFER OVERRUN Yes The print buffer has

overflowed on a serial

interface. The printed

output may contain

random * (asterisk)

characters. Make a

configuration printout.

Verify that the printer matches the

host serial interface configuration

settings for Data Protocol, Baud

Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity,

Data Terminal Ready, and Request

to Send. Set printer serial interface

parameters to match those of the

host.

CLEAR PAPER JAM Yes No paper motion. Clear jam and reload paper. If this

message recurs, contact your

authorized service representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

292

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

CLEARING

PROGRAM FROM

FLASH

No Status message:

emulation software

successfully loaded into

printer RAM and the

checksum matched. The

old program is now being

deleted from flash

memory.

No action is required.

CLOSE PLATEN Yes The platen lever is open. Close the platen lever.

COIL HOT No One or more hammer

coils are overheating.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

CRTG COMM ERR

See User Manual

No The hardware cannot

communicate properly

with the cartridge.

1. Make sure the ribbon cartridge

is seated properly.

Remove and replace the ribbon

cartridge if necessary.

Contact your authorized

service representative.

CRTG MISSING

Install new RBN

Yes The ribbon cartridge is

missing or installed

improperly.

1. Make sure a ribbon cartridge is

installed in the printer.

Make sure the ribbon cartridge

is seated properly.

Remove and replace the

cartridge if necessary.

Contact your authorized

customer service

representative.

CRTG NOT SETx

Re-install RBN

Yes The ribbon cartridge is

not properly positioned.

1. Make sure a ribbon cartridge is

installed in the printer.

Make sure the ribbon cartridge

is seated properly.

Remove and replace the

cartridge if necessary.

Contact your authorized

customer service

representative.

CTL VOLT FAIL* No Controller Voltage

Failure. 15 V failure on

the controller board.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

D50 Status %XX

Clearing Flash

No Status message: The

printer is clearing its flash

memory, where %XX

represents the

percentage completed.

No action is required.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

293

D51 Status %XX

Programming...

No Status message: The

printer is loading

firmware, where %XX

represents the

percentage completed.

No action is required.

D55 Status: Send

Program to EC

No Status message: The

printer is loading the

engine controller program

into the engine controller

(EC).

No action is required.

DIAGNOSTIC

PASSED

No Status message: the

printer passed its

memory and hardware

initialization tests.

No action is required.

DO NOT POWER OFF No Status message: The

printer is performing an

operation that must be

completed before you

can cycle power.

No action is required, but do not

power off the printer until the

operation is complete.

DP FIFO Busy* Yes There is a timing problem

in the Engine Controller

firmware.

1. Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

download the emulation

software again.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears

again, contact your authorized

service representative.

DRVR CIR BAD* No Driver Circuit Bad. The

hammer coil count test

failed.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

E00 EXE @ ADDR0

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

294

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

E01A TYPE 0x40

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E01B TYPE 0x60

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E02 MACHINE CHK

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E03A DSI HASH L

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E03B DSI HASH S

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

295

E03C DSI BAT PL

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E03D DSI BAT PS

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E03E DSI CXIWX

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E03F DSI CXOWX

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E03G DSI ECXIWX

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

296

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

E03H DSI ECXOWX

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E04A ISI NO TRA

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E04B ISI DIRECT

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E04C ISI PROTEC

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E06 NOT ALIGNED

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

297

E07 ILLEGAL INS

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E08 FLOATINGPNT

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E12 SYSTEM CALL

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E13 TRACE INT

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E16 ITRANS MISS

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

298

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

E17 DLOAD MISS

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E18 DSTORE MISS

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E19 BREAKPOINT

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E20 SYS MANAGE

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E30 DEBUGGER

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

299

E31A EVENT O BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E31B EVENT 1 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E31C EVENT 2 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E31D EVENT 3 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E31E EVENT 4 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

300

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

E31F EVENT 5 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E31G EVENT 6 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E31H EVENT 7 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E32A CND 0 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E32B CND 1 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

301

E32C CND 2 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E32D CND 3 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E32E CND 4 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E32F CND 5 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E32G CND 6 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

302

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

E32H CND 7 BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E33 WRITE BP

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E34 TRACE CMPLT

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E99 UNKNOWN INT

See User Manual

Yes An illegal or unsupported

instruction was attempted

in the application

program.

1. Cycle Power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

load the latest emulation

software.

Cycle power. Run the print job

again. If the message appears,

record the display message

and send it to your next higher

support facility.

E Net Test Unavailable Yes The ethernet PCBA did

not initialize correctly.

Cycle power. Wait for “E Net Ready”

to display, then retry operation. If it

still fails, contact your authorized

service representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

303

ERROR: CPLD NOT

PROGRAMMED

No The Complex

Programmable Logic

Device (CPLD) on the

controller board is not

programmed. The EC

cannot read the version

bits in the CPLD which

tell the EC which

configuration version is

installed.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: DC

PROGRAM NOT

VALID

Yes The printer cannot find

the data controller

program or the validation

checksum is corrupt.

Download the program again. If the

message appears, contact your

authorized service representative.

ERROR: DRAM AT

ADDRESS XXXXXXXX

Yes The printer cannot find

the engine controller

program or the validation

checksum is corrupt.

Download the program again. If the

message appears, contact your

authorized service representative.

ERROR: EC

PROGRAM NOT

VALID

The printer cannot find

the engine controller

program or the validation

checksum is corrupt.

Download the program again. If the

message occurs again, contact your

authorized service representative.

ERROR: EC

STOPPED AT STATE

XXXX

No XXXX is a number from

0000 to 0010. The

Engine Controller has

stopped and is in the

state identified by the

number displayed.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: FLASH DID

NOT PROGRAM

Yes The printer encountered

an error trying to program

flash memory.

Download the program again. If the

message displays again, contact

your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: FLASH NOT

DETECTED

No The printer could not find

flash memory.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: LOCKED

SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

nnnnnn

No nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

n is the serial number of

the printer’s security key.

The SPX serial number

does not match the

printer’s serial number

and cannot be used with

the printer.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: NO DRAM

DETECTED

No The printer could not find

any DRAM.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

304

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

ERROR: NVRAM

FAILURE

No The non-volatile SRAM

on the controller board

has failed.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR OCCURRED

FLUSHING QUEUES*

No An interim message that

displays while the printer

discards host data it

cannot use because a

fault condition exists.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: PROGRAM

NEEDS MORE DRAM

No The printer requires more

DRAM to run the

downloaded program.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: PROGRAM

NEEDS MORE FLASH

No The printer requires more

flash memory to run the

downloaded program

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: PROGRAM

NOT COMPATIBLE

Yes The printer is not

compatible with the

downloaded program.

Use the correct emulation software

options(s) for this printer model.

ERROR: PROGRAM

NOT VALID

Yes The printer does not see

a program in flash

memory.

There is no program in printer

memory. Download the emulation.

ERROR: SECURITY

KEY NOT DETECTED

No The security key is not

present or failed.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: SHORT AT

ADDRESS XXXX

No Hardware failure in

SDRAM or controller

circuitry.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: WRITING TO

FLASH

No Hardware or software

fault in flash memory.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: WRONG

CHECKSUM

No The printer received the

complete program but the

checksum did not match.

The data may have been

corrupted during

downloading.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: WRONG

OEM

No The SPX inserted in the

debug port is not

intended for this model

printer or this OEM.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ERROR: WRONG

PRINTER TYPE

No The SPX inserted in the

debug port is not

intended for this model

printer or this OEM.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

305

ETHERNET ADAPTER

BEING INITIALIZED

N/A Status message

indicating that the

ethernet interface is

processing the boot

procedure.

No action is required.

ETHERNET

DETECTED

N/A Status message

indicating that the

Network Interface Card

has established

connection.

No action is required.

ETHERNET

INITIALIZING

No Status message: the

internal Network Interface

Card is processing the

boot procedure. (May

occur with older versions

of microcode.)

No action is required.

EXCESS RBN WEAR

Install New RBN

Yes Status message that

displays when ribbon

reaches end of life,

whether the Integrated

Print Management

System is enabled or not.

Install a new ribbon.

EXHAUST FAN FLT

(Cabinet model only)

Yes Sensors cannot detect

current in fan circuit.

Power off the printer and remove

the paper path (see Maintenance

Manual). Check that the fan cable

connector is connected. Check for

obstruction of vents and fan airway,

and remove any obstructions.

Check for items beneath the printer

blocking cabinet vents. Power back

on the printer. If this message

appears again, contact your

authorized service representative.

FIRMWARE ERROR* No Application software tried

to perform an illegal

printer function or

damaged memory

detected on the controller

board.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

FM HEADER ERROR* No Frame Header Error.

Application software has

violated header

parameters.

Contact your system administrator.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

306

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

FRAMING ERROR Yes The printed output may

contain random !

(exclamation point)

characters.

Make a configuation printout. Set

printer serial interface parameters to

match host configuration settings

for Data Protocol, Baud Rate, Data

Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Data Terminal

Ready, and Request to Send.

FREEFORM OFF Yes A control panel key is

stuck in the down

position.

Press the key again.

FREEFORM ON: OFF

HOLD KEY @ PWRUP

No This message appears if

the freeform feature is

enabled. This feature is

for manufacturing use

only and is never used by

the customer or field

maintenance personnel.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

GRF CHK ERROR

PRESS STOP

Yes Graphic Check Error: in

the CT emulation over a

twinax interface, the

printer received a non-

printable character.

Press ON LINE/CLEAR.

H00: PCI SLOT ?

See User Manual

No The controller board is

not communicating with a

PCI card. This could

indicate a bad PCI card,

poor connection, or

problem in the PCI bus.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

H01: PCI J12

See User Manual

No The controller board is

not communicating with

the PCI card in PCI slot

J12. This could indicate a

bad PCI card, poor

connection, or problem in

the PCI bus.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

H02: PCI J13

See User Manual

No The controller board is

not communicating with

the PCI card in PCI slot

J13. This could indicate a

bad PCI card, poor

connection, or problem in

the PCI bus.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

307

<Online, etc...>

Half Speed Mode

No Status message: The

controller samples the

operating temperature of

key components of the

print mechanism. When

higher than normal

temperatures are sensed,

the print speed is

automatically reduced by

50% and the message

sent the LCD. When the

components cool down,

the print speed returns to

100% and the message

clears.

No action is required. If the

message appears often, contact

your authorized service

representative.

HAM. COIL OPEN* No Hammer Coil Open.

Electrical malfunction of

one or more hammer

coils.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

HAMMER COIL BAD*

#, #, #, ...etc

No Hammer coil # failed

current test at power up.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

HAMMER SHORT*

See User Manual

No Electrical malfunction of

one or more hammer

coils.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

HB NOT INSTALLD* No Hammer Bank Not

Installed. Self-test

routines do not detect

hammer coils at printer

start-up.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

HMR BANK FAN FLT Yes Sensors cannot detect

current in fan circuit.

Check that fan cable is connected.

Check for obstruction of vents and

fan airway; remove any

obstructions. Check for items

beneath the printer blocking cabinet

vents. Power back on the printer. If

this message recurs, contact your

authorized service representative.

ILL EXT BUS ACC* No Illegal External Bus

Access. Firmware error

on the controller board.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ILL INST ACCSS* No Illegal Instruction

Accessed. Firmware

error on the controller

board.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

308

Chapter 7

Diagnosing Problems

ILLGL OPR ACCSS* No Illegal Operand

Accessed. Firmware

error on controller board.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

INCOMPAT E-NET

Remove NIC

Yes Incompatible network

interface card (NIC) is

installed.

Install a compatible NIC to the

printer then reboot. If this message

still appears, contact your

authorized service representative.

INTAKE FAN FAULT Yes Sensors cannot detect

current in fan circuit.

Cycle power. If the message

appears, press ON LINE/CLEAR.

If the message does not clear,

contact your authorized service

representative.

INTERRUPT UNUSED

VECTOR 00

No The controller board

receives an interrupt it

does not understand. The

problem can be created

by electrical noise, by a

software problem, or by a

hardware problem.

Cycle power. If this message

occurred once and never again, you

can ignore it. If the message

reappears or appears consistently,

contact your authorized service

representative.

INVALID ACTIVATE No Printer detects a twinax

protocol communication

error.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

INVALID COMMAND No Printer detects a twinax

protocol communication

error and reports the

error.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

LO DRV. SHORT * No Lower Driver Short.

Circuit(s) on the hammer

bank or in the hammer

bank power cable

shorted to ground.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

LOAD PAPER Yes Printer is out of paper. Load paper and press ON LINE/

CLEAR.

LOADING PROGRAM

FROM PORT XX%

No Status message: the new

emulation program is

loading into printer RAM.

XX% indicates how much

of the program has

loaded.

No action is required.

LOADING PROGRAM

INTO FLASH

No The printer has deleted

the previous program

from flash memory and is

loading the new program

into flash memory.

No action is required.

Table 17. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table

Displayed Message Can User

Correct? Explanation Solution

Fault Messages

309

NEW SPX DETECTED

PRESS ENTER

No The printer detects an

SPX installed at the

debug port and the SPX

is valid for the printer.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

NON VOLATILE

MEMORY FAILED

No Large emulations reduce

the amount of space

available for saving

configurations, which

means that sometimes

fewer than eight

configurations can be

saved.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ON LINE N/A Printer state message:

printer is online and in

communication with host.

No action is required.

ONLINE

28 CU NOT ENAB

Yes Controller Unit Not

Enabled. Poll

time-out error. The printer

was not polled for one

minute across a coax

interface.

Check cable connection and host

system.

ONLINE

8344 FAILED*

No Link-level code test

detects hardware failure.

Contact your authorized service

representative.

ONLINE

CU TIMED OUT

Yes Controller Unit Timed

Out. The printer was not

enabled for one minute or

PTX_UM_P7_P7HD_CRP_254796G PTX UM P7 P7HD CRP 254796G